Movatterモバイル変換


[0]ホーム

URL:


[RFC Home] [TEXT|PDF|HTML] [Tracker] [IPR] [Errata] [Info page]

Obsoleted by:5125 HISTORIC
Errata Exist
Network Working Group                                          C. GrovesRequest for Comments: 3525                                   M. PantaleoObsoletes:3015                                              LM EricssonCategory: Standards Track                                    T. Anderson                                                              Consultant                                                               T. Taylor                                                         Nortel Networks                                                                 Editors                                                               June 2003Gateway Control Protocol Version 1Status of this Memo   This document specifies an Internet standards track protocol for the   Internet community, and requests discussion and suggestions for   improvements.  Please refer to the current edition of the "Internet   Official Protocol Standards" (STD 1) for the standardization state   and status of this protocol.  Distribution of this memo is unlimited.Copyright Notice   Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2003).  All Rights Reserved.Abstract   This document defines the protocol used between elements of a   physically decomposed multimedia gateway, i.e., a Media Gateway and a   Media Gateway Controller.  The protocol presented in this document   meets the requirements for a media gateway control protocol as   presented inRFC 2805.   This document replacesRFC 3015.  It is the result of continued   cooperation between the IETF Megaco Working Group and ITU-T Study   Group 16.  It incorporates the original text ofRFC 3015, modified by   corrections and clarifications discussed on the Megaco   E-mail list and incorporated into the Study Group 16 Implementor's   Guide for Recommendation H.248.  The present version of this document   underwent  ITU-T Last Call as Recommendation H.248 Amendment 1.   Because of ITU-T renumbering, it was published by the ITU-T as   Recommendation H.248.1 (03/2002), Gateway Control Protocol Version 1.   Users of this specification are advised to consult the H.248 Sub-   series Implementors' Guide athttp://www.itu.int/itudoc/itu-t/com16/implgd for additional corrections and clarifications.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                     [Page 1]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003Conventions used in this document   The key words "MUST", "MUST NOT", "REQUIRED", "SHALL", "SHALL NOT",   "SHOULD", "SHOULD NOT", "RECOMMENDED", "MAY", and "OPTIONAL" in this   document are to be interpreted as described inRFC 2119 [RFC2119].Table of Contents1 Scope.........................................................51.1 Changes FromRFC 3015.....................................51.2 Differences From ITU-T Recommendation H.248.1 (03/2002)...52 References....................................................62.1 Normative references......................................62.2 Informative references....................................93 Definitions..................................................104 Abbreviations................................................115 Conventions..................................................126 Connection model.............................................136.1 Contexts.................................................166.2 Terminations.............................................176.2.1 Termination dynamics.................................216.2.2 TerminationIDs.......................................216.2.3 Packages.............................................226.2.4 Termination properties and descriptors...............236.2.5 Root Termination.....................................257 Commands.....................................................267.1 Descriptors..............................................277.1.1 Specifying parameters................................277.1.2 Modem descriptor.....................................287.1.3 Multiplex descriptor.................................287.1.4 Media descriptor.....................................297.1.5 TerminationState descriptor..........................297.1.6 Stream descriptor....................................307.1.7 LocalControl descriptor..............................317.1.8 Local and Remote descriptors.........................327.1.9 Events descriptor....................................357.1.10 EventBuffer descriptor..............................387.1.11 Signals descriptor..................................387.1.12 Audit descriptor....................................407.1.13 ServiceChange descriptor............................417.1.14 DigitMap descriptor.................................417.1.15 Statistics descriptor...............................467.1.16 Packages descriptor.................................477.1.17 ObservedEvents descriptor...........................477.1.18 Topology descriptor.................................477.1.19 Error Descriptor....................................507.2 Command Application Programming Interface................507.2.1 Add..................................................51Groves, et al.              Standards Track                     [Page 2]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 20037.2.2 Modify...............................................527.2.3 Subtract.............................................537.2.4 Move.................................................557.2.5 AuditValue...........................................567.2.6 AuditCapabilities....................................597.2.7 Notify...............................................607.2.8 ServiceChange........................................617.2.9 Manipulating and Auditing Context Attributes.........657.2.10 Generic Command Syntax..............................667.3 Command Error Codes......................................668 Transactions.................................................668.1 Common parameters........................................688.1.1 Transaction Identifiers..............................688.1.2 Context Identifiers..................................688.2 Transaction Application Programming Interface............698.2.1 TransactionRequest...................................698.2.2 TransactionReply.....................................698.2.3 TransactionPending...................................718.3 Messages.................................................729 Transport....................................................729.1 Ordering of Commands.....................................739.2 Protection against Restart Avalanche.....................7410 Security Considerations.....................................7510.1 Protection of Protocol Connections......................7510.2 Interim AH scheme.......................................7610.3 Protection of Media Connections.........................7711 MG-MGC Control Interface....................................7811.1 Multiple Virtual MGs....................................7811.2 Cold start..............................................7911.3 Negotiation of protocol version.........................7911.4 Failure of a MG.........................................8011.5 Failure of an MGC.......................................8112 Package definition..........................................8212.1 Guidelines for defining packages........................8212.1.1 Package.............................................8312.1.2 Properties..........................................8412.1.3 Events..............................................8512.1.4 Signals.............................................8512.1.5 Statistics..........................................8612.1.6 Procedures..........................................86     12.2 Guidelines to defining Parameters to Events and Signals.8612.3 Lists...................................................8712.4 Identifiers.............................................8712.5 Package registration....................................8813 IANA Considerations.........................................8813.1 Packages................................................8813.2 Error codes.............................................8913.3 ServiceChange reasons...................................89Groves, et al.              Standards Track                     [Page 3]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   ANNEX A  Binary encoding of the protocol.......................90A.1 Coding of wildcards......................................90A.2 ASN.1 syntax specification...............................92A.3 Digit maps and path names...............................111   ANNEX B Text encoding of the protocol.........................113B.1 Coding of wildcards.....................................113B.2 ABNF specification......................................113B.3 Hexadecimal octet coding................................127B.4 Hexadecimal octet sequence..............................127   ANNEX C Tags for media stream properties......................128C.1 General media attributes................................128C.2 Mux properties..........................................130C.3 General bearer properties...............................130C.4 General ATM properties..................................130C.5 Frame Relay.............................................134C.6 IP......................................................134C.7 ATM AAL2................................................134C.8 ATM AAL1................................................136C.9 Bearer capabilities.....................................137C.10 AAL5 properties........................................147C.11 SDP equivalents........................................148C.12 H.245..................................................149   ANNEX D Transport over IP.....................................150D.1 Transport over IP/UDP using Application Level Framing ..150D.1.1 Providing At-Most-Once functionality................150D.1.2 Transaction identifiers and three-way handshake.....151D.1.3 Computing retransmission timers.....................152D.1.4 Provisional responses...............................153D.1.5 Repeating Requests, Responses and Acknowledgements..153D.2 Using TCP...............................................155D.2.1 Providing the At-Most-Once functionality............155D.2.2 Transaction identifiers and three-way handshake.....155D.2.3 Computing retransmission timers.....................156D.2.4 Provisional responses...............................156D.2.5 Ordering of commands................................156   ANNEX E  Basic packages.......................................157E.1 Generic.................................................157E.2 Base Root Package.......................................159E.3 Tone Generator Package..................................161E.4 Tone Detection Package..................................163E.5 Basic DTMF Generator Package............................166E.6 DTMF detection Package..................................167E.7 Call Progress Tones Generator Package...................169E.8 Call Progress Tones Detection Package...................171E.9 Analog Line Supervision Package.........................172E.10 Basic Continuity Package...............................175E.11 Network Package........................................178E.12 RTP Package............................................180Groves, et al.              Standards Track                     [Page 4]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003E.13 TDM Circuit Package....................................182   APPENDIX I EXAMPLE CALL FLOWS (INFORMATIVE)...................184A.1 Residential Gateway to Residential Gateway Call.........184       A.1.1 Programming Residential GW Analog Line Terminations             for Idle Behavior...................................184       A.1.2 Collecting Originator Digits and Initiating             Termination.........................................186   APPENDIX II  Changes FromRFC 3015............................195   Intellectual Property Rights..................................210   Acknowledgments...............................................211   Authors' Addresses............................................212   Full Copyright Statement......................................2131  Scope   The present document, which is identical to the published version of   ITU-T Recommendation H.248.1 (03/2002) except as noted below, defines   the protocols used between elements of a physically decomposed   multimedia gateway.  There are no functional differences from a   system view between a decomposed gateway, with distributed sub-   components potentially on more than one physical device, and a   monolithic gateway such as described in ITU-T Recommendation H.246.   This document does not define how gateways, multipoint control units   or interactive voice response units (IVRs) work.  Instead it creates   a general framework that is suitable for these applications.   Packet network interfaces may include IP, ATM or possibly others.   The interfaces will support a variety of Switched Circuit Network   (SCN) signalling systems, including tone signalling, ISDN, ISUP, QSIG   and GSM.  National variants of these signalling systems will be   supported where applicable.1.1 Changes FromRFC 3015   The differences between this document andRFC 3015 are documented inAppendix II.1.2 Differences From ITU-T Recommendation H.248.1 (03/2002)   This document differs from the corresponding ITU-T publication in the   following respects:   -  Added IETF front matter in place of the corresponding ITU-T      material.   -  The ITU-T summary is too H.323-specific and has been omitted.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                     [Page 5]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   -  The IETF conventions have been stated as governing this document.      As discussed insection 5 below, this gives slightly greater      strength to "should" requirements.   -  The Scope section (just above) has been edited slightly to suit      its IETF context.   -  Added normative references to RFCs 2026 and 2119.   -  Figures 4, 5, and 6 show the centre of the context for greater      clarity.  Also added Figure 6a showing an important additional      example.   -  Added a paragraph insection 7.1.18 which was approved in the      Implementor's Guide but lost inadvertently in the ITU-T approved      version.   -  This document incorporates corrections to the informative examples      inAppendix I which also appear in H.248.1 version 2, but which      were not picked up in H.248.1 (03/2002).   -  This document includes a newAppendix II listing all the changes      fromRFC 3015.   -  This document includes an Acknowledgements section listing the      authors ofRFC 3015 but also many other people who contributed to      the development of the Megaco/H.248.x protocol.   -  Moved the Intellectual Property declaration to its usual place in      an IETF document and added a reference to declarations on the IETF      web site.2  References   The following ITU-T Recommendations and other references contain   provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute   provisions of this RFC.  At the time of publication, the editions   indicated were valid.  All Recommendations and other references are   subject to revision; all users of this RFC are therefore encouraged   to investigate the possibility of applying the most recent edition of   the Recommendations and other references listed below.  A list of the   currently valid ITU-T Recommendations is regularly published.2.1   Normative references   -  ITU-T Recommendation H.225.0 (1999), Call signalling protocols and      media stream packetization for packet-based multimedia      communication systems.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                     [Page 6]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   -  ITU-T Recommendation H.235 (1998), Security and encryption for      H-Series (H.323 and other H.245-based) multimedia terminals.   -  ITU-T Recommendation H.245 (1998), Control protocol for multimedia      communication.   -  ITU-T Recommendation H.246 (1998), Interworking of H-series      multimedia terminals with H-series multimedia terminals and      voice/voiceband terminals on GSTN and ISDN.   -  ITU-T Recommendation H.248.8 (2002), H.248 Error Codes and Service      Change Reasons.   -  ITU-T Recommendation H.323 (1999), Packet-based multimedia      communication systems.   -  ITU-T Recommendation I.363.1 (1996), B-ISDN ATM adaptation layer      (AAL) specification: Type 1 AAL.   -  ITU-T Recommendation I.363.2 (1997), B-ISDN ATM adaptation layer      (AAL) specification: Type 2 AAL.   -  ITU-T Recommendation I.363.5 (1996), B-ISDN ATM adaptation layer      (AAL) specification: Type 5 AAL.   -  ITU-T Recommendation I.366.1 (1998), Segmentation and Reassembly      Service Specific Convergence Sublayer for the AAL type 2.   -  ITU-T Recommendation I.366.2 (1999), AAL type 2 service specific      convergence sublayer for trunking.   -  ITU-T Recommendation I.371 (2000), Traffic control and congestion      control in B-ISDN.   -  ITU-T Recommendation Q.763 (1999), Signalling System No. 7 - ISDN      user part formats and codes.   -  ITU-T Recommendation Q.765.5 (2001), Application transport      mechanism - Bearer independent call control (BICC).   -  ITU-T Recommendation Q.931 (1998), ISDN user-network interface      layer 3 specification for basic call control.   -  ITU-T Recommendation Q.2630.1 (1999), AAL type 2 signalling      protocol (Capability Set 1).Groves, et al.              Standards Track                     [Page 7]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   -  ITU-T Recommendation Q.2931 (1995), Digital Subscriber Signalling      System No. 2 (DSS2) - User-Network Interface (UNI) - Layer 3      specification for basic call/connection control.   -  ITU-T Recommendation Q.2941.1 (1997), Digital Subscriber      Signalling System No. 2 - Generic identifier transport.   -  ITU-T Recommendation Q.2961.1 (1995), Additional signalling      capabilities to support traffic parameters for the tagging option      and the sustainable call rate parameter set.   -  ITU-T Recommendation Q.2961.2 (1997), Additional traffic      parameters: Support of ATM transfer capability in the broadband      bearer capability information element.   -  ITU-T Recommendation Q.2965.1 (1999), Digital subscriber      signalling system No. 2 - Support of Quality of Service classes.   -  ITU-T Recommendation Q.2965.2 (1999), Digital subscriber      signalling system No. 2 - Signalling of individual Quality of      Service parameters.   -  ITU-T Recommendation V.76 (1996), Generic multiplexer using V.42      LAPM-based procedures.   -  ITU-T Recommendation X.213 (1995), Information technology - Open      Systems Interconnection - Network service definition plus      Amendment 1 (1997), Addition of the Internet protocol address      format identifier.   -  ITU-T Recommendation X.680 (1997), Information technology -      Abstract Syntax Notation One (ASN.1): Specification of basic      notation.   -  ITU-T Recommendation X.690 (1997), Information Technology - ASN.1      Encoding Rules: Specification of Basic Encoding Rules (BER),      Canonical Encoding Rules (CER) and Distinguished Encoding Rules      (DER).   -  ATM Forum (1996), ATM User-Network Interface (UNI) Signalling      Specification - Version 4.0.   [RFC 1006] Rose, M. and D. Cass, "ISO Transport Service on top of the              TCP, Version 3", STD 35,RFC 1006, May 1987.   [RFC 2026] Brander, S., "The Internet Standards Process -- Revision              3",BCP 9,RFC 2026, October 1996.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                     [Page 8]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   [RFC 2119] Bradner, S., "Key words for use in RFCs to Indicate              Requirement Levels",BCP 14,RFC 2119, March 1997.   [RFC 2234] Crocker, D., Ed. and P. Overell, "Augmented BNF for Syntax              Specifications: ABNF",RFC 2234, November 1997.   [RFC 2327] Handley, M. and V. Jacobson, "SDP: Session Description              Protocol",RFC 2327, April 1998.   [RFC 2402] Kent, S. and R. Atkinson, "IP Authentication Header",RFC2402, November 1998.   [RFC 2406] Kent, S. and R. Atkinson, "IP Encapsulating Security              Payload (ESP)",RFC 2406, November 1998.2.2   Informative references   -  ITU-T Recommendation E.180/Q.35 (1998), Technical characteristics      of tones for the telephone service.   -  CCITT Recommendation G.711 (1988), Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) of      voice frequencies.   -  ITU-T Recommendation H.221 (1999), Frame structure for a 64 to      1920 kbit/s channel in audiovisual teleservices.   -  ITU  T Recommendation H.223 (1996), Multiplexing protocol for low      bit rate multimedia communication.   -  ITU-T Recommendation H.226 (1998), Channel aggregation protocol      for multilink operation on circuit-switched networks   -  ITU-T Recommendation Q.724 (1998), Signalling procedures.   -  ITU-T Recommendation Q.764 (1999), Signalling system No. 7 - ISDN      user part signalling procedures.   -  ITU-T Recommendation Q.1902.4 (2001), Bearer independent call      control protocol - Basic call procedures.   [RFC 768]  Postel, J., "User Datagram Protocol", STD 6,RFC 768,              August 1980.   [RFC 791]  Postel, J., "Internet Protocol", STD 5,RFC 791, September              1981.   [RFC 793]  Postel, J., "Transmission Control Protocol", STD 7,RFC793, September 1981.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                     [Page 9]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   [RFC 1661] Simpson, W., Ed., "The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP)", STD              51,RFC 1661, July 1994.   [RFC 1889] Schulzrinne, H., Casner, S., Frederick, R. and V.              Jacobson, "RTP: A Transport Protocol for Real-Time              Applications",RFC 1889, January 1996.   [RFC 1890] Schulzrinne, H. and G. Fokus, "RTP Profile for Audio and              Video Conferences with Minimal Control",RFC 1890,              January 1996.   [RFC 2401] Kent, S. and R. Atkinson, "Security Architecture for the              Internet Protocol",RFC 2401, November 1998.   [RFC 2460] Deering, S. and R. Hinden, "Internet Protocol, Version 6              (IPv6) Specification",RFC 2460, December 1998.   [RFC 2543] Handley, M., Schulzrinne, H., Schooler, E. and J.              Rosenberg, "SIP: Session Initiation Protocol",RFC 2543,              March 1999.   [RFC 2805] Greene, N., Ramalho, M. and B. Rosen, "Media Gateway              Control Protocol Architecture and Requirements",RFC 2805,              April 2000.3  Definitions   This document defines the following terms:   Access gateway:   A type of gateway that provides a User-Network Interface (UNI) such   as ISDN.   Descriptor:   A syntactic element of the protocol that groups related properties.   For instance, the properties of a media flow on the MG can be set by   the MGC by including the appropriate descriptor in a command.   Media Gateway (MG):   The media gateway converts media provided in one type of network to   the format required in another type of network.  For example, a MG   could terminate bearer channels from a switched circuit network   (e.g., DS0s) and media streams from a packet network (e.g., RTP   streams in an IP network).  This gateway may be capable of processing   audio, video and T.120 alone or in any combination, and will be   capable of full duplex media translations.  The MG may also play   audio/video messages and perform other IVR functions, or may perform   media conferencing.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 10]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   Media Gateway Controller (MGC):   Controls the parts of the call state that pertain to connection   control for media channels in a MG.   Multipoint Control Unit (MCU):   An entity that controls the setup and coordination of a multi-user   conference that typically includes processing of audio, video and   data.   Residential gateway:   A gateway that interworks an analogue line to a packet network.  A   residential gateway typically contains one or two analogue lines and   is located at the customer premises.   SCN FAS signalling gateway:   This function contains the SCN Signalling Interface that terminates   SS7, ISDN or other signalling links where the call control channel   and bearer channels are collocated in the same physical span.   SCN NFAS signalling gateway:   This function contains the SCN Signalling Interface that terminates   SS7 or other signalling links where the call control channels are   separated from bearer channels.   Stream:   Bidirectional media or control flow received/sent by a media gateway   as part of a call or conference.   Trunk:   A communication channel between two switching systems such as a DS0   on a T1 or E1 line.   Trunking gateway:   A gateway between SCN network and packet network that typically   terminates a large number of digital circuits.4  Abbreviations   This RFC document uses the following abbreviations:   ALF   Application Layer Framing   ATM   Asynchronous Transfer Mode   CAS   Channel Associated Signalling   DTMF  Dual Tone Multi-FrequencyGroves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 11]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   FAS   Facility Associated Signalling   GSM   Global System for Mobile communications   GW    GateWay   IANA  Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (superseded by Internet         Corporation for Assigned Names and Numbers - ICANN)   IP    Internet Protocol   ISUP  ISDN User Part   IVR   Interactive Voice Response   MG    Media Gateway   MGC   Media Gateway Controller   NFAS  Non-Facility Associated Signalling   PRI   Primary Rate Interface   PSTN  Public Switched Telephone Network   QoS   Quality of Service   RTP   Real-time Transport Protocol   SCN   Switched Circuit Network   SG    Signalling Gateway   SS7   Signalling System No. 75  Conventions   In the H.248.1 Recommendation, "SHALL" refers to a mandatory   requirement, while "SHOULD" refers to a suggested but optional   feature or procedure.  The term "MAY" refers to an optional course of   action without expressing a preference.  Note that these definition   are overridden in the present document by theRFC 2119 conventions   stated at the beginning of this document.RFC 2119 has a more   precise definition of "should" than is provided by the ITU-T.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 12]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 20036  Connection model   The connection model for the protocol describes the logical entities,   or objects, within the Media Gateway that can be controlled by the   Media Gateway Controller.  The main abstractions used in the   connection model are Terminations and Contexts.   A Termination sources and/or sinks one or more streams.  In a   multimedia conference, a Termination can be multimedia and sources or   sinks multiple media streams.  The media stream parameters, as well   as modem, and bearer parameters are encapsulated within the   Termination.   A Context is an association between a collection of Terminations.   There is a special type of Context, the null Context, which contains   all Terminations that are not associated to any other Termination.   For instance, in a decomposed access gateway, all idle lines are   represented by Terminations in the null Context.   Following is a graphical depiction of these concepts.  The diagram of   Figure 1 gives several examples and is not meant to be an   all-inclusive illustration.  The asterisk box in each of the Contexts   represents the logical association of Terminations implied by the   Context.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 13]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003         +------------------------------------------------------+         |Media Gateway                                         |         | +-------------------------------------------------+  |         | |Context                          +-------------+ |  |         | |                                 | Termination | |  |         | |                                 |-------------| |  |         | |  +-------------+             +->| SCN Bearer  |<---+->         | |  | Termination |   +-----+   |  |   Channel   | |  |         | |  |-------------|   |     |---+  +-------------+ |  |       <-+--->| RTP Stream  |---|  *  |                      |  |         | |  |             |   |     |---+  +-------------+ |  |         | |  +-------------+   +-----+   |  | Termination | |  |         | |                              |  |-------------| |  |         | |                              +->| SCN Bearer  |<---+->         | |                                 |   Channel   | |  |         | |                                 +-------------+ |  |         | +-------------------------------------------------+  |         |                                                      |         |                                                      |         |                    +------------------------------+  |         |   (NULL Context)   |Context                       |  |         |  +-------------+   |              +-------------+ |  |         |  | Termination |   | +-----+      | Termination | |  |         |  |-------------|   | |     |      |-------------| |  |         |  | SCN Bearer  |   | |  *  |------| SCN Bearer  |<---+->         |  |   Channel   |   | |     |      |   Channel   | |  |         |  +-------------+   | +-----+      +-------------+ |  |         |                    +------------------------------+  |         |                                                      |         |                                                      |         | +-------------------------------------------------+  |         | |Context                                          |  |         | |  +-------------+                +-------------+ |  |         | |  | Termination |   +-----+      | Termination | |  |         | |  |-------------|   |     |      |-------------| |  |       <-+--->| SCN Bearer  |---|  *  |------| SCN Bearer  |<---+->         | |  |   Channel   |   |     |      |   Channel   | |  |         | |  +-------------+   +-----+      +-------------+ |  |         | +-------------------------------------------------+  |         | ___________________________________________________  |         +------------------------------------------------------+            Figure 1: Examples of Megaco/H.248 Connection ModelGroves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 14]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   The example in Figure 2 shows an example of one way to accomplish a   call-waiting scenario in a decomposed access gateway, illustrating   the relocation of a Termination between Contexts.  Terminations T1   and T2 belong to Context C1 in a two-way audio call.  A second audio   call is waiting for T1 from Termination T3.  T3 is alone in Context   C2.  T1 accepts the call from T3, placing T2 on hold.  This action   results in T1 moving into Context C2, as shown in Figure 3.         +------------------------------------------------------+         |Media Gateway                                         |         | +-------------------------------------------------+  |         | |Context C1                                       |  |         | |  +-------------+                +-------------+ |  |         | |  | Term. T2    |   +-----+      | Term. T1    | |  |         | |  |-------------|   |     |      |-------------| |  |       <-+--->| RTP Stream  |---|  *  |------| SCN Bearer  |<---+->         | |  |             |   |     |      |   Channel   | |  |         | |  +-------------+   +-----+      +-------------+ |  |         | +-------------------------------------------------+  |         |                                                      |         | +-------------------------------------------------+  |         | |Context C2                                       |  |         | |                                 +-------------+ |  |         | |                    +-----+      | Term. T3    | |  |         | |                    |     |      |-------------| |  |         | |                    |  *  |------| SCN Bearer  |<---+->         | |                    |     |      |   Channel   | |  |         | |                    +-----+      +-------------+ |  |         | +-------------------------------------------------+  |         +------------------------------------------------------+     Figure 2: Example Call Waiting Scenario / Alerting Applied to T1Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 15]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003         +------------------------------------------------------+         |Media Gateway                                         |         | +-------------------------------------------------+  |         | |Context C1                                       |  |         | |  +-------------+                                |  |         | |  | Term. T2    |   +-----+                      |  |         | |  |-------------|   |     |                      |  |       <-+--->| RTP Stream  |---|  *  |                      |  |         | |  |             |   |     |                      |  |         | |  +-------------+   +-----+                      |  |         | +-------------------------------------------------+  |         |                                                      |         | +-------------------------------------------------+  |         | |Context C2                                       |  |         | |  +-------------+                +-------------+ |  |         | |  | Term. T1    |   +-----+      | Term. T3    | |  |         | |  |-------------|   |     |      |-------------| |  |       <-+--->| SCN Bearer  |---|  *  |------| SCN Bearer  |<---+->         | |  |   Channel   |   |     |      |   Channel   | |  |         | |  +-------------+   +-----+      +-------------+ |  |         | +-------------------------------------------------+  |         +------------------------------------------------------+          Figure 3. Example Call Waiting Scenario / Answer by T16.1   Contexts   A Context is an association between a number of Terminations.  The   Context describes the topology (who hears/sees whom) and the media   mixing and/or switching parameters if more than two Terminations are   involved in the association.   There is a special Context called the null Context.  It contains   Terminations that are not associated to any other Termination.   Terminations in the null Context can have their parameters examined   or modified, and may have events detected on them.   In general, an Add command is used to add Terminations to Contexts.   If the MGC does not specify an existing Context to which the   Termination is to be added, the MG creates a new Context.  A   Termination may be removed from a Context with a Subtract command,   and a Termination may be moved from one Context to another with a   Move command.  A Termination SHALL exist in only one Context at a   time.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 16]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   The maximum number of Terminations in a Context is a MG property.   Media gateways that offer only point-to-point connectivity might   allow at most two Terminations per Context.  Media gateways that   support multipoint conferences might allow three or more Terminations   per Context.6.1.1 Context attributes and descriptors   The attributes of Contexts are:   -  ContextID.   -  The topology (who hears/sees whom).      The topology of a Context describes the flow of media between the      Terminations within a Context.  In contrast, the mode of a      Termination (send/receive/...) describes the flow of the media at      the ingress/egress of the media gateway.   -  The priority is used for a Context in order to provide the MG with      information about a certain precedence handling for a Context.      The MGC can also use the priority to control autonomously the      traffic precedence in the MG in a smooth way in certain      situations (e.g., restart), when a lot of Contexts must be handled      simultaneously.  Priority 0 is the lowest priority and a priority      of 15 is the highest priority.   -  An indicator for an emergency call is also provided to allow a      preference handling in the MG.6.1.2 Creating, deleting and modifying Contexts   The protocol can be used to (implicitly) create Contexts and modify   the parameter values of existing Contexts.  The protocol has commands   to add Terminations to Contexts, subtract them from Contexts, and to   move Terminations between Contexts.  Contexts are deleted implicitly   when the last remaining Termination is subtracted or moved out.6.2   Terminations   A Termination is a logical entity on a MG that sources and/or sinks   media and/or control streams.  A Termination is described by a number   of characterizing Properties, which are grouped in a set of   Descriptors that are included in commands.  Terminations have unique   identities (TerminationIDs), assigned by the MG at the time of their   creation.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 17]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   Terminations representing physical entities have a semi-permanent   existence.  For example, a Termination representing a TDM channel   might exist for as long as it is provisioned in the gateway.   Terminations representing ephemeral information flows, such as RTP   flows, would usually exist only for the duration of their use.   Ephemeral Terminations are created by means of an Add command.  They   are destroyed by means of a Subtract command.  In contrast, when a   physical Termination is Added to or Subtracted from a Context, it is   taken from or to the null Context, respectively.   Terminations may have signals applied to them (see 7.1.11).   Terminations may be programmed to detect Events, the occurrence of   which can trigger notification messages to the MGC, or action by the   MG.  Statistics may be accumulated on a Termination.  Statistics are   reported to the MGC upon request (by means of the AuditValue command,   see 7.2.5) and when the Termination is taken out of the call it is   in.   Multimedia gateways may process multiplexed media streams.  For   example, Recommendation H.221 describes a frame structure for   multiple media streams multiplexed on a number of digital 64 kbit/s   channels.  Such a case is handled in the connection model in the   following way.  For every bearer channel that carries part of the   multiplexed streams, there is a physical or ephemeral "bearer   Termination".  The bearer Terminations that source/sink the digital   channels are connected to a separate Termination called the   "multiplexing Termination".  The multiplexing termination is an   ephemeral termination representing a frame-oriented session.  The   MultiplexDescriptor for this Termination describes the multiplex used   (e.g., H.221 for an H.320 session) and indicates the order in which   the contained digital channels are assembled into a frame.   Multiplexing terminations may be cascades (e.g., H.226 multiplex of   digital channels feeding into a H.223 multiplex supporting an H.324   session).   The individual media streams carried in the session are described by   StreamDescriptors on the multiplexing Termination.  These media   streams can be associated with streams sourced/sunk by Terminations   in the Context other than the bearer Terminations supporting the   multiplexing Termination.  Each bearer Termination supports only a   single data stream.  These data streams do not appear explicitly as   streams on the multiplexing Termination and they are hidden from the   rest of the context.   Figures 4, 5, 6, and 6a illustrate typical applications of the   multiplexing termination and Multiplex Descriptor.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 18]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003                  +-----------------------------------+                  | Context     +-------+             |                 +----+         |       |             |   Circuit 1 -|--| TC1|---------+ Tmux  |             |              |  +----+ (Str 1) |       |  Audio    +-----+              |   |             |       +-----*-----+     |-----              |  +----+         | H.22x | Stream 1  |     |   Circuit 2 -|--| TC2|---------+ multi-|           | TR1 |              |  +----+ (Str 1) | plex  |           |(RTP)|              |   |             |       |  Video    |     |              |  +----+         |       +-----*-----+     |-----   Circuit 3 -|--| TC3|---------+       | Stream 2  |     |              /  +----+ (Str 1) |       |           +-----+             /    |             +-------+             |            /     +-----------------\-----------------+   Audio, video, and control         \   signals are carried in frames    Tmux is an ephemeral with two   spanning the circuits.           explicit Stream Descriptors                                    and a Multiplex Descriptor.      Figure 4: Multiplexed Termination Scenario - Circuit to Packet              (Asterisks * denote the centre of the context)                    Context                  +--------------------------------------+                  |       +-------+        +-------+     |                 +----+   |       |        |       |   +----+   Circuit 1 ----| TC1|---+ Tmux1 |  Audio | Tmux2 +---| TC4|---                 +----+   |       +---*----+       |   +----+                  |       |       |  Str 1 |       |     |                 +----+   | H.22x |        | H.22x |   +----+   Circuit 2 ----| TC2|---+ multi-|        | multi-+---| TC5|---                 +----+   | plex  |        | plex  |   +----+                  |       |       |  Video |       |     |                 +----+   |       +---*----+       |   +----+   Circuit 3 ----| TC3|---+       |  Str 2 |       +---| TC6|---                 +----+   |       |        |       |   +----+                  |       +-------+        +-------+     |                  +-----------------\-----/--------------+                                     \   /             Tmux1 and Tmux2 are ephemerals each with two            explicit Stream Descriptors and a Multiplex Descriptor.      Figure 5: Multiplexed Termination Scenario - Circuit to Circuit              (Asterisks * denote the centre of the context)Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 19]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003                  +-----------------------------------+                  | Context     +-------+             |                 +----+         |       |             |   Circuit 1 -|--| TC1|---------+ Tmux  |             |              |  +----+ (Str 1) |       |  Audio    +-----+              |   |             |       +-----*-----+ TR1 |-----              |  +----+         | H.22x | Stream 1  |(RTP)|   Circuit 2 -|--| TC2|---------+ multi-|           +-----+              |  +----+ (Str 1) | plex  |             |              |   |             |       |  Video    +-----+              |  +----+         |       +-----*-----+ TR2 |-----   Circuit 3 -|--| TC3|---------+       | Stream 2  |(RTP)|              /  +----+ (Str 1) |       |           +-----+             /    |             +-------+             |            /     +-----------------\-----------------+   Audio, video, and control         \ Tmux is an ephemeral with two   signals are carried in frames    explicit Stream Descriptors and   spanning the circuits.           and a Multiplex Descriptor.      Figure 6: Multiplexed Termination Scenario - Single to Multiple                               Terminations              (Asterisks * denote the centre of the context)            Context          +---------------------------------------------+          |       +-------+       +-------+             |   Cct 1 +----+   |       |       |       | Audio     +-----+     ----| TC1|---+ Tmux1 |       | Tmux2 +-----*-----| TR1 |-----         +----+   |       |       |       | Stream 1  |(RTP)|          |       |       | Data  |       |           +-----+   Cct 2 +----+   | H.226 +-------+ H.223 |             |     ----| TC2|---+ multi-|(Str 1)| multi-| Control   +-----+         +----+   | plex  |       | plex  +-----*-----+ Tctl|-----          |       |       |       |       | Stream 3  +-----+   Cct 3 +----+   |       |       |       |             |     ----| TC3|---+       |       |       |           +-----+         +----+   |       |       |       +-----*-----+ TR2 |-----          |       +-------+       |       |  Video    |(RTP)|          |                       +-------+ Stream 2  +-----+          |                                             |          +---------------------------------------------+        Tmux1 has a Multiplex Descriptor and a single data stream.        Tmux2 has a Multiplex Descriptor with a single bearer and        three explicit Stream Descriptors.    Figure 6a: Multiplexed Termination Scenario - Cascaded Multiplexes              (Asterisks * denote the centre of the context)     Note: this figure does not appear in Rec.  H.248.1Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 20]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   Terminations may be created which represent multiplexed bearers, such   as an ATM AAL Type 2 bearer.  When a new multiplexed bearer is to be   created, an ephemeral Termination is created in a Context established   for this purpose.  When the Termination is subtracted, the   multiplexed bearer is destroyed.6.2.1 Termination dynamics   The protocol can be used to create new Terminations and to modify   property values of existing Terminations.  These modifications   include the possibility of adding or removing events and/or signals.   The Termination properties, and events and signals are described in   the ensuing subclauses.  An MGC can only release/modify Terminations   and the resources that the Termination represents which it has   previously seized via, e.g., the Add command.6.2.2 TerminationIDs   Terminations are referenced by a TerminationID, which is an arbitrary   schema chosen by the MG.   TerminationIDs of physical Terminations are provisioned in the Media   Gateway.  The TerminationIDs may be chosen to have structure.  For   instance, a TerminationID may consist of trunk group and a trunk   within the group.   A wildcarding mechanism using two types of wildcards can be used with   TerminationIDs.  The two wildcards are ALL and CHOOSE.  The former is   used to address multiple Terminations at once, while the latter is   used to indicate to a media gateway that it must select a Termination   satisfying the partially specified TerminationID.  This allows, for   instance, that a MGC instructs a MG to choose a circuit within a   trunk group.   When ALL is used in the TerminationID of a command, the effect is   identical to repeating the command with each of the matching   TerminationIDs.  The use of ALL does not address the ROOT   termination.  Since each of these commands may generate a response,   the size of the entire response may be large.  If individual   responses are not required, a wildcard response may be requested.  In   such a case, a single response is generated, which contains the UNION   of all of the individual responses which otherwise would have been   generated, with duplicate values suppressed.  For instance, given a   Termination Ta with properties p1=a, p2=b and Termination Tb withGroves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 21]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   properties p2=c, p3=d, a UNION response would consist of a wildcarded   TerminationId and the sequence of properties p1=a, p2=b,c and p3=d.   Wildcard response may be particularly useful in the Audit commands.   The encoding of the wildcarding mechanism is detailed in Annexes A   and B.6.2.3 Packages   Different types of gateways may implement Terminations that have   widely differing characteristics.  Variations in Terminations are   accommodated in the protocol by allowing Terminations to have   optional Properties, Events, Signals and Statistics implemented by   MGs.   In order to achieve MG/MGC interoperability, such options are grouped   into Packages, and typically a Termination realizes a set of such   Packages.  More information on definition of packages can be found in   clause 12.  An MGC can audit a Termination to determine which   Packages it realizes.   Properties, Events, Signals and Statistics defined in Packages, as   well as parameters to them, are referenced by identifiers (Ids).   Identifiers are scoped.  For each package, PropertyIds, EventIds,   SignalIds, StatisticsIds and ParameterIds have unique name spaces and   the same identifier may be used in each of them.  Two PropertyIds in   different packages may also have the same identifier, etc.   To support a particular package the MG must support all properties,   signals, events and statistics defined in a package.  It must also   support all Signal and Event parameters.  The MG may support a subset   of the values listed in a package for a particular Property or   Parameter.   When packages are extended, the properties, events, signals and   statistics defined in the base package can be referred to using   either the extended package name or the base package name.  For   example, if Package A defines event e1, and Package B extends Package   A, then B/e1 is an event for a termination implementing Package B. By   definition, the MG MUST also implement the base Package, but it is   optional to publish the base package as an allowed interface.  If it   does publish  A, then A would be reported on the Package Descriptor   in AuditValue as well as B, and event A/e1 would be available on a   termination.  If the MG does not publish A, then only B/e1 would be   available.  If published through AuditValue, A/e1 and B/e1 are the   same event.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 22]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   For improved interoperability and backward compatibility, an MG MAY   publish all Packages supported by its Terminations, including base   Packages from which extended Packages are derived.  An exception to   this is in cases where the base packages are expressly "Designed to   be extended only".6.2.4 Termination properties and descriptors   Terminations have properties.  The properties have unique   PropertyIDs. Most properties have default values, which are   explicitly defined in this protocol specification or in a package   (see clause 12) or set by provisioning.  If not provisioned   otherwise, the properties in all descriptors except TerminationState   and LocalControl default to empty/"no value" when a Termination is   first created or returned to the null Context.  The default contents   of the two exceptions are described in 7.1.5 and 7.1.7.   The provisioning of a property value in the MG will override any   default value, be it supplied in this protocol specification or in a   package.  Therefore if it is essential for the MGC to have full   control over the property values of a Termination, it should supply   explicit values when ADDing the Termination to a Context.   Alternatively, for a physical Termination the MGC can determine any   provisioned property values by auditing the Termination while it is   in the NULL Context.   There are a number of common properties for Terminations and   properties specific to media streams.  The common properties are also   called the Termination state properties.  For each media stream,   there are local properties and properties of the received and   transmitted flows.   Properties not included in the base protocol are defined in Packages.   These properties are referred to by a name consisting of the   PackageName and a PropertyId.  Most properties have default values   described in the Package description.  Properties may be read-only or   read/write.  The possible values of a property may be audited, as can   their current values.  For properties that are read/write, the MGC   can set their values.  A property may be declared as "Global" which   has a single value shared by all Terminations realizing the package.   Related properties are grouped into descriptors for convenience.   When a Termination is added to a Context, the value of its read/write   properties can be set by including the appropriate descriptors as   parameters to the Add command.  Similarly, a property of a   Termination in a Context may have its value changed by the Modify   command.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 23]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   Properties may also have their values changed when a Termination is   moved from one Context to another as a result of a Move command.  In   some cases, descriptors are returned as output from a command.   In general, if a Descriptor is completely omitted from one of the   aforementioned Commands, the properties in that Descriptor retain   their prior values for the Termination(s) upon which the Command   acts.  On the other hand, if some read/write properties are omitted   from a Descriptor in a Command (i.e., the Descriptor is only   partially specified), those properties will be reset to their default   values for the Termination(s) upon which the Command acts, unless the   package specifies other behavior.  For more details, see clause 7.1   dealing with the individual Descriptors.   The following table lists all of the possible descriptors and their   use.  Not all descriptors are legal as input or output parameters to   every command.   Descriptor name  Description   Modem            Identifies modem type and properties when                    applicable   Mux              Describes multiplex type for multimedia                    Terminations (e.g., H.221, H.223, H.225.0) and                    Terminations forming the input mux   Media            A list of media stream specifications (see 7.1.4)   TerminationState Properties of a Termination (which can be defined                    in Packages) that are not stream specific   Stream           A list of remote/local/localControl descriptors for                    a single stream   Local            Contains properties that specify the media flows                    that the MG receives from the remote entity.   Remote           Contains properties that specify the media flows                    that the MG sends to the remote entity.   LocalControl     Contains properties (which can be defined in                    packages) that are of interest between the MG and                    the MGC.   Events           Describes events to be detected by the MG and what                    to do when an event is detected.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 24]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   EventBuffer      Describes events to be detected by the MG when                    Event Buffering is active.   Signals          Describes signals (see 7.1.11) applied  to                    Terminations.   Audit            In Audit commands, identifies which information is                    desired.   Packages         In AuditValue, returns a list of Packages realized                    by Termination.   DigitMap         Defines patterns against which sequences of a                    specified set of events are to be matched so they                    can be reported as a group rather than singly.   ServiceChange    In ServiceChange, what, why service change                    occurred, etc.   ObservedEvents   In Notify or AuditValue, report of events observed.   Statistics       In Subtract and Audit, report of Statistics kept on                    a Termination.   Topology         Specifies flow directions between Terminations in a                    Context.   Error            Contains an error code and optionally error text;                    it may occur in command replies and in Notify                    requests.6.2.5 Root Termination   Occasionally, a command must refer to the entire gateway, rather than   a Termination within it.  A special TerminationID, "Root" is reserved   for this purpose.  Packages may be defined on Root.  Root thus may   have properties, events and statistics (signals are not appropriate   for root).  Accordingly, the root TerminationID may appear in:   -  a Modify command - to change a property or set an event   -  a Notify command - to report an event   -  an AuditValue return - to examine the values of properties and      statistics implemented on root   -  an AuditCapability - to determine what properties of root are      implementedGroves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 25]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   -  a ServiceChange - to declare the gateway in or out of service.   Any other use of the root TerminationID is an error.  Error code   410 - Incorrect identifier shall be returned in these cases.7  Commands   The protocol provides commands for manipulating the logical entities   of the protocol connection model, Contexts and Terminations.   Commands provide control at the finest level of granularity supported   by the protocol.  For example, Commands exist to add Terminations to   a Context, modify Terminations, subtract Terminations from a Context,   and audit properties of Contexts or Terminations.  Commands provide   for complete control of the properties of Contexts and Terminations.   This includes specifying which events a Termination is to report,   which signals/actions are to be applied to a Termination and   specifying the topology of a Context (who hears/sees whom).   Most commands are for the specific use of the Media Gateway   Controller as command initiator in controlling Media Gateways as   command responders.  The exceptions are the Notify and ServiceChange   commands: Notify is sent from Media Gateway to Media Gateway   Controller, and ServiceChange may be sent by either entity.  Below is   an overview of the commands; they are explained in more detail in   7.2.   1) Add - The Add command adds a Termination to a Context.  The Add      command on the first Termination in a Context is used to create a      Context.   2) Modify - The Modify command modifies the properties, events and      signals of a Termination.   3) Subtract - The Subtract command disconnects a Termination from its      Context and returns statistics on the Termination's participation      in the Context.  The Subtract command on the last Termination in a      Context deletes the Context.   4) Move - The Move command atomically moves a Termination to another      Context.   5) AuditValue - The AuditValue command returns the current state of      properties, events, signals and statistics of Terminations.   6) AuditCapabilities - The AuditCapabilities command returns all the      possible values for Termination properties, events and signals      allowed by the Media Gateway.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 26]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   7) Notify - The Notify command allows the Media Gateway to inform the      Media Gateway Controller of the occurrence of events in the Media      Gateway.   8) ServiceChange - The ServiceChange command allows the Media Gateway      to notify the Media Gateway Controller that a Termination or group      of Terminations is about to be taken out of service or has just      been returned to service.  ServiceChange is also used by the MG to      announce its availability to a MGC (registration), and to notify      the MGC of impending or completed restart of the MG.  The MGC may      announce a handover to the MG by sending it a ServiceChange      command.  The MGC may also use ServiceChange to instruct the MG to      take a Termination or group of Terminations in or out of service.   These commands are detailed in 7.2.1 through 7.2.8.7.1   Descriptors   The parameters to a command are termed Descriptors.  A descriptor   consists of a name and a list of items.  Some items may have values.   Many Commands share common descriptors.  This subclause enumerates   these descriptors.  Descriptors may be returned as output from a   command.  In any such return of descriptor contents, an empty   descriptor is represented by its name unaccompanied by any list.   Parameters and parameter usage specific to a given Command type are   described in the subclause that describes the Command.7.1.1 Specifying parameters   Command parameters are structured into a number of descriptors.  In   general, the text format of descriptors is   DescriptorName=<someID>{parm=value, parm=value, ...}.   Parameters may be fully specified, overspecified or underspecified:   1) Fully specified parameters have a single, unambiguous value that      the command initiator is instructing the command responder to use      for the specified parameter.   2) Underspecified parameters, using the CHOOSE value, allow the      command responder to choose any value it can support.   3) Overspecified parameters have a list of potential values.  The      list order specifies the command initiator's order of preference      of selection.  The command responder chooses one value from      the offered list and returns that value to the command initiator.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 27]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   If a required descriptor other than the Audit descriptor is   unspecified (i.e., entirely absent) from a command, the previous   values set in that descriptor for that Termination, if any, are   retained.  In commands other than Subtract, a missing Audit   descriptor is equivalent to an empty Audit descriptor.  The Behaviour   of the MG with respect to unspecified parameters within a descriptor   varies with the descriptor concerned, as indicated in succeeding   subclauses.  Whenever a parameter is underspecified or overspecified,   the descriptor containing the value chosen by the responder is   included as output from the command.   Each command specifies the TerminationId the command operates on.   This TerminationId may be "wildcarded".  When the TerminationId of a   command is wildcarded, the effect shall be as if the command was   repeated with each of the TerminationIds matched.7.1.2 Modem descriptor   The Modem descriptor specifies the modem type and parameters, if any,   required for use in e.g., H.324 and text conversation.  The   descriptor includes the following modem types: V.18, V.22, V.22 bis,   V.32, V.32 bis, V.34, V.90, V.91, Synchronous ISDN, and allows for   extensions.  By default, no Modem descriptor is present in a   Termination.7.1.3 Multiplex descriptor   In multimedia calls, a number of media streams are carried on a   (possibly different) number of bearers.  The multiplex descriptor   associates the media and the bearers.  The descriptor includes the   multiplex type:   -  H.221;   -  H.223;   -  H.226;   -  V.76;   -  possible extensions,   and a set of TerminationIDs representing the multiplexed bearers, in   order.  For example:      Mux = H.221{ MyT3/1/2, MyT3/2/13, MyT3/3/6, MyT3/21/22}Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 28]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 20037.1.4 Media descriptor   The Media descriptor specifies the parameters for all the media   streams.  These parameters are structured into two descriptors: a   TerminationState descriptor, which specifies the properties of a   Termination that are not stream dependent, and one or more Stream   descriptors each of which describes a single media stream.   A stream is identified by a StreamID.  The StreamID is used to link   the streams in a Context that belong together.  Multiple streams   exiting a Termination shall be synchronized with each other.  Within   the Stream descriptor, there are up to three subsidiary descriptors:   LocalControl, Local, and Remote.  The relationship between these   descriptors is thus:   Media descriptor      TerminationState Descriptor      Stream descriptor         LocalControl descriptor         Local descriptor         Remote descriptor   As a convenience, LocalControl, Local, or Remote descriptors may be   included in the Media descriptor without an enclosing Stream   descriptor.  In this case, the StreamID is assumed to be 1.7.1.5 TerminationState descriptor   The TerminationState descriptor contains the ServiceStates property,   the EventBufferControl property and properties of a Termination   (defined in Packages) that are not stream specific.   The ServiceStates property describes the overall state of the   Termination (not stream specific).  A Termination can be in one of   the following states: "test", "out of service", or "in service".  The   "test" state indicates that the Termination is being tested.  The   state "out of service" indicates that the Termination cannot be used   for traffic.  The state "in service" indicates that a Termination can   be used or is being used for normal traffic.  "in service" is the   default state.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 29]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   Values assigned to Properties may be simple values   (integer/string/enumeration) or may be underspecified, where more   than one value is supplied and the MG may make a choice:   -  Alternative Values - multiple values in a list, one of which must      be selected   -  Ranges - minimum and maximum values, any value between min and max      must be selected, boundary values included   -  Greater Than/Less Than - value must be greater/less than specified      value   -  CHOOSE Wildcard - the MG chooses from the allowed values for the      property   The EventBufferControl property specifies whether events are buffered   following detection of an event in the Events descriptor, or   processed immediately.  See 7.1.9 for details.7.1.6 Stream descriptor   A Stream descriptor specifies the parameters of a single   bidirectional stream.  These parameters are structured into three   descriptors: one that contains Termination properties specific to a   stream and one each for local and remote flows.  The Stream   Descriptor includes a StreamID which identifies the stream.  Streams   are created by specifying a new StreamID on one of the Terminations   in a Context.  A stream is deleted by setting empty Local and Remote   descriptors for the stream with ReserveGroup and ReserveValue in   LocalControl set to "false" on all Terminations in the Context that   previously supported that stream.   StreamIDs are of local significance between MGC and MG and they are   assigned by the MGC.  Within a Context, StreamID is a means by which   to indicate which media flows are interconnected: streams with the   same StreamID are connected.   If a Termination is moved from one Context to another, the effect on   the Context to which the Termination is moved is the same as in the   case that a new Termination were added with the same StreamIDs as the   moved Termination.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 30]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 20037.1.7 LocalControl descriptor   The LocalControl descriptor contains the Mode property, the   ReserveGroup and ReserveValue properties and properties of a   Termination (defined in Packages) that are stream specific, and are   of interest between the MG and the MGC.  Values of properties may be   underspecified as in 7.1.1.   The allowed values for the mode property are send-only, receive-only,   send/receive, inactive and loop-back. "Send" and "receive" are with   respect to the exterior of the Context, so that, for example, a   stream set to mode=sendOnly does not pass received media into the   Context.  The default value for the mode property is "Inactive".   Signals and Events are not affected by mode.   The boolean-valued Reserve properties, ReserveValue and ReserveGroup,   of a Termination indicate what the MG is expected to do when it   receives a Local and/or Remote descriptor.   If the value of a Reserve property is True, the MG SHALL reserve   resources for all alternatives specified in the Local and/or Remote   descriptors for which it currently has resources available.  It SHALL   respond with the alternatives for which it reserves resources.  If it   cannot not support any of the alternatives, it SHALL respond with a   reply to the MGC that contains empty Local and/or Remote descriptors.   If media begins to flow while more than a single alternative is   reserved, media packets may be sent/received on any of the   alternatives and must be processed, although only a single   alternative may be active at any given time.   If the value of a Reserve property is False, the MG SHALL choose one   of the alternatives specified in the Local descriptor (if present)   and one of the alternatives specified in the Remote descriptor (if   present).  If the MG has not yet reserved resources to support the   selected alternative, it SHALL reserve the resources.  If, on the   other hand, it already reserved resources for the Termination   addressed (because of a prior exchange with ReserveValue and/or   ReserveGroup equal to True), it SHALL release any excess resources it   reserved previously.  Finally, the MG shall send a reply to the MGC   containing the alternatives for the Local and/or Remote descriptor   that it selected.  If the MG does not have sufficient resources to   support any of the alternatives specified, it SHALL respond with   error 510 (insufficient resources).   The default value of ReserveValue and ReserveGroup is False.  More   information on the use of the two Reserve properties is provided in   7.1.8.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 31]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   A new setting of the LocalControl Descriptor completely replaces the   previous setting of that descriptor in the MG.  Thus, to retain   information from the previous setting, the MGC must include that   information in the new setting.  If the MGC wishes to delete some   information from the existing descriptor, it merely resends the   descriptor (in a Modify command) with the unwanted information   stripped out.7.1.8 Local and Remote descriptors   The MGC uses Local and Remote descriptors to reserve and commit MG   resources for media decoding and encoding for the given Stream(s) and   Termination to which they apply.  The MG includes these descriptors   in its response to indicate what it is actually prepared to support.   The MG SHALL include additional properties and their values in its   response if these properties are mandatory yet not present in the   requests made by the MGC (e.g., by specifying detailed video encoding   parameters where the MGC only specified the payload type).   Local refers to the media received by the MG and Remote refers to the   media sent by the MG.   When text encoding the protocol, the descriptors consist of session   descriptions as defined in SDP (RFC 2327).  In session descriptions   sent from the MGC to the MG, the following exceptions to the syntax   ofRFC 2327 are allowed:   -  the "s=", "t=" and "o=" lines are optional;   -  the use of CHOOSE is allowed in place of a single parameter value;      and   -  the use of alternatives is allowed in place of a single parameter      value.   A Stream Descriptor specifies a single bi-directional media stream   and so a single session description MUST NOT include more than one   media description ("m=" line).  A Stream Descriptor may contain   additional session descriptions as alternatives.  Each media stream   for a termination must appear in distinct Stream Descriptors.  When   multiple session descriptions are provided in one descriptor, the   "v=" lines are required as delimiters; otherwise they are optional in   session descriptions sent to the MG.  Implementations shall accept   session descriptions that are fully conformant toRFC 2327.  When   binary encoding the protocol the descriptor consists of groups of   properties (tag-value pairs) as specified in Annex C.  Each such   group may contain the parameters of a session description.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 32]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   Below, the semantics of the Local and Remote descriptors are   specified in detail.  The specification consists of two parts.  The   first part specifies the interpretation of the contents of the   descriptor.  The second part specifies the actions the MG must take   upon receiving the Local and Remote descriptors.  The actions to be   taken by the MG depend on the values of the ReserveValue and   ReserveGroup properties of the LocalControl descriptor.   Either the Local or the Remote descriptor or both may be:   1) unspecified (i.e., absent);   2) empty;   3) underspecified through use of CHOOSE in a property value;   4) fully specified; or   5) overspecified through presentation of multiple groups of      properties and possibly multiple property values in one or more of      these groups.   Where the descriptors have been passed from the MGC to the MG, they   are interpreted according to the rules given in 7.1.1, with the   following additional comments for clarification:   a) An unspecified Local or Remote descriptor is considered to be a      missing mandatory parameter.  It requires the MG to use whatever      was last specified for that descriptor.  It is possible that there      was no previously specified value, in which case the descriptor      concerned is ignored in further processing of the command.   b) An empty Local (Remote) descriptor in a message from the MGC      signifies a request to release any resources reserved for the      media flow received (sent).   c) If multiple groups of properties are present in a Local or Remote      descriptor or multiple values within a group, the order of      preference is descending.   d) Underspecified or overspecified properties within a group of      properties sent by the MGC are requests for the MG to choose one      or more values which it can support for each of those properties.      In case of an overspecified property, the list of values is in      descending order of preference.   Subject to the above rules, subsequent action depends on the values   of the ReserveValue and ReserveGroup properties in LocalControl.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 33]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   If ReserveGroup is True, the MG reserves the resources required to   support any of the requested property group alternatives that it can   currently support.  If ReserveValue is True, the MG reserves the   resources required to support any of the requested property value   alternatives that it can currently support.   NOTE - If a Local or Remote descriptor contains multiple groups of   properties, and ReserveGroup is True, then the MG is requested to   reserve resources so that it can decode or encode the media stream   according to any of the alternatives.  For instance, if the Local   descriptor contains two groups of properties, one specifying   packetized G.711 A-law audio and the other G.723.1 audio, the MG   reserves resources so that it can decode one audio stream encoded in   either G.711 A-law format or G.723.1 format.  The MG does not have to   reserve resources to decode two audio streams simultaneously, one   encoded in G.711 A-law and one in G.723.1.  The intention for the use   of ReserveValue is analogous.   If ReserveGroup is true or ReserveValue is True, then the following   rules apply:   -  If the MG has insufficient resources to support all alternatives      requested by the MGC and the MGC requested resources in both Local      and Remote, the MG should reserve resources to support at least      one alternative each within Local and Remote.   -  If the MG has insufficient resources to support at least one      alternative within a Local (Remote) descriptor received from the      MGC, it shall return an empty Local (Remote) in response.   -  In its response to the MGC, when the MGC included Local and Remote      descriptors, the MG SHALL include Local and Remote descriptors for      all groups of properties and property values it reserved resources      for.  If the MG is incapable of supporting at least one of the      alternatives within the Local (Remote) descriptor received from      the MGC, it SHALL return an empty Local (Remote) descriptor.   -  If the Mode property of the LocalControl descriptor is RecvOnly,      SendRecv, or LoopBack, the MG must be prepared to receive media      encoded according to any of the alternatives included in its      response to the MGC.   If ReserveGroup is False and ReserveValue is False, then the MG   SHOULD apply the following rules to resolve Local and Remote to a   single alternative each:   -  The MG chooses the first alternative in Local for which it is able      to support at least one alternative in Remote.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 34]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   -  If the MG is unable to support at least one Local and one Remote      alternative, it returns Error 510 (Insufficient Resources).   -  The MG returns its selected alternative in each of Local and      Remote.   A new setting of a Local or Remote descriptor completely replaces the   previous setting of that descriptor in the MG.  Thus, to retain   information from the previous setting, the MGC must include that   information in the new setting.  If the MGC wishes to delete some   information from the existing descriptor, it merely resends the   descriptor (in a Modify command) with the unwanted information   stripped out.7.1.9 Events descriptor   The EventsDescriptor parameter contains a RequestIdentifier and a   list of events that the Media Gateway is requested to detect and   report.  The RequestIdentifier is used to correlate the request with   the notifications that it may trigger.  Requested events include, for   example, fax tones, continuity test results, and on-hook and off-hook   transitions.  The RequestIdentifier is omitted if the   EventsDescriptor is empty (i.e., no events are specified).   Each event in the descriptor contains the Event name, an optional   streamID, an optional KeepActive flag, and optional parameters.  The   Event name consists of a Package Name (where the event is defined)   and an EventID.  The ALL wildcard may be used for the EventID,   indicating that all events from the specified package have to be   detected.  The default streamID is 0, indicating that the event to be   detected is not related to a particular media stream.  Events can   have parameters.  This allows a single event description to have some   variation in meaning without creating large numbers of individual   events.  Further event parameters are defined in the package.   If a digit map completion event is present or implied in the   EventsDescriptor, the EventDM parameter is used to carry either the   name or the value of the associated digit map.  See 7.1.14 for   further details.   When an event is processed against the contents of an active Events   Descriptor and found to be present in that descriptor ("recognized"),   the default action of the MG is to send a Notify command to the MGC.   Notification may be deferred if the event is absorbed into the   current dial string of an active digit map (see 7.1.14).  Any other   action is for further study.  Moreover, event recognition may cause   currently active signals to stop, or may cause the current Events   and/or Signals descriptor to be replaced, as described at the end ofGroves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 35]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   this subclause.  Unless the Events Descriptor is replaced by another   Events Descriptor, it remains active after an event has been   recognized.   If the value of the EventBufferControl property equals LockStep,   following detection of such an event, normal handling of events is   suspended.  Any event which is subsequently detected and occurs in   the EventBuffer descriptor is added to the end of the EventBuffer (a   FIFO queue), along with the time that it was detected.  The MG SHALL   wait for a new EventsDescriptor to be loaded.  A new EventsDescriptor   can be loaded either as the result of receiving a command with a new   EventsDescriptor, or by activating an embedded EventsDescriptor.   If EventBufferControl equals Off, the MG continues processing based   on the active EventsDescriptor.   In the case of an embedded EventsDescriptor being activated, the MG   continues event processing based on the newly activated   EventsDescriptor.     NOTE 1 - For purposes of EventBuffer handling, activation of an     embedded EventsDescriptor is equivalent to receipt of a new     EventsDescriptor.   When the MG receives a command with a new EventsDescriptor, one or   more events may have been buffered in the EventBuffer in the MG.  The   value of EventBufferControl then determines how the MG treats such   buffered events.   Case 1   If EventBufferControl equals LockStep and the MG receives a new   EventsDescriptor, it will check the FIFO EventBuffer and take the   following actions:   1) If the EventBuffer is empty, the MG waits for detection of events      based on the new EventsDescriptor.   2) If the EventBuffer is non-empty, the MG processes the FIFO queue      starting with the first event:      a) If the event in the queue is in the events listed in the new         EventsDescriptor, the MG acts on the event and removes the         event from the EventBuffer.  The time stamp of the Notify shall         be the time the event was actually detected.  The MG then waits         for a new EventsDescriptor.  While waiting for a new         EventsDescriptor, any events detected that appear in theGroves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 36]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003         EventsBufferDescriptor will be placed in the EventBuffer.  When         a new EventsDescriptor is received, the event processing will         repeat from step 1.      b) If the event is not in the new EventsDescriptor, the MG SHALL         discard the event and repeat from step 1.   Case 2   If EventBufferControl equals Off and the MG receives a new   EventsDescriptor, it processes new events with the new   EventsDescriptor.   If the MG receives a command instructing it to set the value of   EventBufferControl to Off, all events in the EventBuffer SHALL be   discarded.   The MG may report several events in a single Transaction as long as   this does not unnecessarily delay the reporting of individual events.   For procedures regarding transmitting the Notify command, refer to   the appropriate annex or Recommendation of the H.248 sub-series for   specific transport considerations.   The default value of EventBufferControl is Off.     NOTE 2 - Since the EventBufferControl property is in the     TerminationStateDescriptor, the MG might receive a command that     changes the EventBufferControl property and does not include an     EventsDescriptor.   Normally, recognition of an event shall cause any active signals to   stop.  When KeepActive is specified in the event, the MG shall not   interrupt any signals active on the Termination on which the event is   detected.   An event can include an Embedded Signals descriptor and/or an   Embedded Events descriptor which, if present, replaces the current   Signals/Events descriptor when the event is recognized.  It is   possible, for example, to specify that the dial-tone Signal be   generated when an off-hook Event is recognized, or that the dial-tone   Signal be stopped when a digit is recognized.  A media gateway   controller shall not send EventsDescriptors with an event both marked   KeepActive and containing an embedded SignalsDescriptor.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 37]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   Only one level of embedding is permitted.  An embedded   EventsDescriptor SHALL NOT contain another embedded EventsDescriptor;   an embedded EventsDescriptor MAY contain an embedded   SignalsDescriptor.   An EventsDescriptor received by a media gateway replaces any previous   Events descriptor.  Event notification in process shall complete, and   events detected after the command containing the new EventsDescriptor   executes, shall be processed according to the new EventsDescriptor.   An empty Events Descriptor disables all event recognition and   reporting.  An empty EventBuffer Descriptor clears the EventBuffer   and disables all event accumulation in LockStep mode: the only events   reported will be those occurring while an Events Descriptor is   active.  If an empty Events Descriptor is activated while the   Termination is operating in LockStep mode, the events buffer is   immediately cleared.7.1.10   EventBuffer descriptor   The EventBuffer descriptor contains a list of events, with their   parameters if any, that the MG is requested to detect and buffer when   EventBufferControl equals LockStep (see 7.1.9).7.1.11   Signals descriptor   Signals are MG generated media such as tones and announcements as   well as bearer-related signals such as hookswitch.  More complex   signals may include a sequence of such simple signals interspersed   with and conditioned upon the receipt and analysis of media or   bearer-related signals.  Examples include echoing of received data as   in Continuity Test package.  Signals may also request preparation of   media content for future signals.   A SignalsDescriptor is a parameter that contains the set of signals   that the Media Gateway is asked to apply to a Termination.  A   SignalsDescriptor contains a number of signals and/or sequential   signal lists.  A SignalsDescriptor may contain zero signals and   sequential signal lists.  Support of sequential signal lists is   optional.   Signals are defined in packages.  Signals shall be named with a   Package name (in which the signal is defined) and a SignalID.  No   wildcard shall be used in the SignalID.  Signals that occur in a   SignalsDescriptor have an optional StreamID parameter (default is 0,   to indicate that the signal is not related to a particular media   stream), an optional signal type (see below), an optional duration   and possibly parameters defined in the package that defines theGroves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 38]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   signal.  This allows a single signal to have some variation in   meaning, obviating the need to create large numbers of individual   signals.   Finally, the optional parameter "notifyCompletion" allows a MGC to   indicate that it wishes to be notified when the signal finishes   playout.  The possible cases are that the signal timed out (or   otherwise completed on its own), that it was interrupted by an event,   that it was halted when a Signals descriptor was replaced, or that it   stopped or never started for other reasons.  If the notifyCompletion   parameter is not included in a Signals descriptor, notification is   generated only if the signal stopped or was never started for other   reasons.  For reporting to occur, the signal completion event (see   E.1.2) must be enabled in the currently active Events descriptor.   The duration is an integer value that is expressed in hundredths of a   second.   There are three types of signals:   -  on/off - the signal lasts until it is turned off;   -  timeout - the signal lasts until it is turned off or a specific      period of time elapses;   -  brief - the signal will stop on its own unless a new Signals      descriptor is applied that causes it to stop; no timeout value is      needed.   If a signal of default type other than TO has its type overridden to   type TO in the Signals descriptor, the duration parameter must be   present.   If the signal type is specified in a SignalsDescriptor, it overrides   the default signal type (see 12.1.4).  If duration is specified for   an on/off signal, it SHALL be ignored.   A sequential signal list consists of a signal list identifier and a   sequence of signals to be played sequentially.  Only the trailing   element of the sequence of signals in a sequential signal list may be   an on/off signal.  The duration of a sequential signal list is the   sum of the durations of the signals it contains.   Multiple signals and sequential signal lists in the same   SignalsDescriptor shall be played simultaneously.   Signals are defined as proceeding from the Termination towards the   exterior of the Context unless otherwise specified in a package.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 39]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   When the same Signal is applied to multiple Terminations within one   Transaction, the MG should consider using the same resource to   generate these Signals.   Production of a Signal on a Termination is stopped by application of   a new SignalsDescriptor, or detection of an Event on the Termination   (see 7.1.9).   A new SignalsDescriptor replaces any existing SignalsDescriptor.  Any   signals applied to the Termination not in the replacement descriptor   shall be stopped, and new signals are applied, except as follows.   Signals present in the replacement descriptor and containing the   KeepActive flag shall be continued if they are currently playing and   have not already completed.  If a replacement signal descriptor   contains a signal that is not currently playing and contains the   KeepActive flag, that signal SHALL be ignored.  If the replacement   descriptor contains a sequential signal list with the same identifier   as the existing descriptor, then   -  the signal type and sequence of signals in the sequential signal      list in the replacement descriptor shall be ignored; and   -  the playing of the signals in the sequential signal list in the      existing descriptor shall not be interrupted.7.1.12   Audit descriptor   The Audit descriptor specifies what information is to be audited.   The Audit descriptor specifies the list of descriptors to be   returned.  Audit may be used in any command to force the return of   any descriptor containing the current values of its properties,   events, signals and statistics even if that descriptor was not   present in the command, or had no underspecified parameters.   Possible items in the Audit descriptor are:      Modem      Mux      Events      Media      Signals      ObservedEvents      DigitMap      Statistics      Packages      EventBufferGroves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 40]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   Audit may be empty, in which case, no descriptors are returned.  This   is useful in Subtract, to inhibit return of statistics, especially   when using wildcard.7.1.13   ServiceChange descriptor   The ServiceChangeDescriptor contains the following parameters:      .  ServiceChangeMethod      .  ServiceChangeReason      .  ServiceChangeAddress      .  ServiceChangeDelay      .  ServiceChangeProfile      .  ServiceChangeVersion      .  ServiceChangeMGCId      .  TimeStamp      .  Extension   See 7.2.8.7.1.14   DigitMap descriptor7.1.14.1 DigitMap definition, creation, modification and deletion   A DigitMap is a dialing plan resident in the Media Gateway used for   detecting and reporting digit events received on a Termination.  The   DigitMap descriptor contains a DigitMap name and the DigitMap to be   assigned.  A digit map may be preloaded into the MG by management   action and referenced by name in an EventsDescriptor, may be defined   dynamically and subsequently referenced by name, or the actual   digitmap itself may be specified in the EventsDescriptor.  It is   permissible for a digit map completion event within an Events   descriptor to refer by name to a DigitMap which is defined by a   DigitMap descriptor within the same command, regardless of the   transmitted order of the respective descriptors.   DigitMaps defined in a DigitMapDescriptor can occur in any of the   standard Termination manipulation Commands of the protocol.  A   DigitMap, once defined, can be used on all Terminations specified by   the (possibly wildcarded) TerminationID in such a command.  DigitMaps   defined on the root Termination are global and can be used on every   Termination in the MG, provided that a DigitMap with the same name   has not been defined on the given Termination.  When a DigitMap is   defined dynamically in a DigitMap descriptor:   -  A new DigitMap is created by specifying a name that is not yet      defined.  The value shall be present.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 41]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   -  A DigitMap value is updated by supplying a new value for a name      that is already defined.  Terminations presently using the      digitmap shall continue to use the old definition; subsequent      EventsDescriptors specifying the name, including any      EventsDescriptor in the command containing the DigitMap      descriptor, shall use the new one.   -  A DigitMap is deleted by supplying an empty value for a name that      is already defined.  Terminations presently using the digitmap      shall continue to use the old definition.7.1.14.2 DigitMap Timers   The collection of digits according to a DigitMap may be protected by   three timers, viz. a start timer (T), short timer (S), and long timer   (L).   1) The start timer (T) is used prior to any digits having been      dialed.  If the start timer is overridden with the value set to      zero (T=0), then the start timer shall be disabled.  This implies      that the MG will wait indefinitely for digits.   2) If the Media Gateway can determine that at least one more digit is      needed for a digit string to match any of the allowed patterns in      the digit map, then the interdigit timer value should be set to a      long (L) duration (e.g., 16 seconds).   3) If the digit string has matched one of the patterns in a digit      map, but it is possible that more digits could be received which      would cause a match with a different pattern, then instead of      reporting the match immediately, the MG must apply the short timer      (S) and wait for more digits.   The timers are configurable parameters to a DigitMap.  Default values   of these timers should be provisioned on the MG, but can be   overridden by values specified within the DigitMap.7.1.14.3 DigitMap Syntax   The formal syntax of the digit map is described by the DigitMap rule   in the formal syntax description of the protocol (see Annex A and   Annex B).  A DigitMap, according to this syntax, is defined either by   a string or by a list of strings.  Each string in the list is an   alternative event sequence, specified either as a sequence of digit   map symbols or as a regular expression of digit map symbols.  These   digit map symbols, the digits "0" through "9" and letters "A" through   a maximum value depending on the signalling system concerned, but   never exceeding "K", correspond to specified events within a packageGroves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 42]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   which has been designated in the Events descriptor on the Termination   to which the digit map is being applied.  (The mapping between events   and digit map symbols is defined in the documentation for packages   associated with channel-associated signalling systems such as DTMF,   MF, or R2.  Digits "0" through "9" MUST be mapped to the   corresponding digit events within the signalling system concerned.   Letters should be allocated in logical fashion, facilitating the use   of range notation for alternative events.)   The letter "x" is used as a wildcard, designating any event   corresponding to symbols in the range "0"-"9".  The string may also   contain explicit ranges and, more generally, explicit sets of   symbols, designating alternative events any one of which satisfies   that position of the digit map.  Finally, the dot symbol "." stands   for zero or more repetitions of the event selector (event, range of   events, set of alternative events, or wildcard) that precedes it.  As   a consequence of the third timing rule above, inter-event timing   while matching a terminal dot symbol uses the short timer by default.   In addition to these event symbols, the string may contain "S" and   "L" inter-event timing specifiers and the "Z" duration modifier.  "S"   and "L" respectively indicate that the MG should use the short (S)   timer or the long (L) timer for subsequent events, overriding the   timing rules described above.  If an explicit timing specifier is in   effect in one alternative event sequence, but none is given in any   other candidate alternative, the timer value set by the explicit   timing specifier must be used.  If all sequences with explicit timing   controls are dropped from the candidate set, timing reverts to the   default rules given above.  Finally, if conflicting timing specifiers   are in effect in different alternative sequences, the long timer   shall be used.   A "Z" designates a long duration event: placed in front of the   symbol(s) designating the event(s) which satisfy a given digit   position, it indicates that that position is satisfied only if the   duration of the event exceeds the long-duration threshold.  The value   of this threshold is assumed to be provisioned in the MG.7.1.14.4 DigitMap Completion Event   A digit map is active while the Events descriptor which invoked it is   active and it has not completed.  A digit map completes when:   -  a timer has expired; or   -  an alternative event sequence has been matched and no other      alternative event sequence in the digit map could be matched      through detection of an additional event (unambiguous match); orGroves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 43]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   -  an event has been detected such that a match to a complete      alternative event sequence of the digit map will be impossible no      matter what additional events are received.   Upon completion, a digit map completion event as defined in the   package providing the events being mapped into the digit map shall be   generated.  At that point the digit map is deactivated.  Subsequent   events in the package are processed as per the currently active event   processing mechanisms.7.1.14.5 DigitMap Procedures   Pending completion, successive events shall be processed according to   the following rules:   1) The "current dial string", an internal variable, is initially      empty.  The set of candidate alternative event sequences includes      all of the alternatives specified in the digit map.   2) At each step, a timer is set to wait for the next event, based      either on the default timing rules given above or on explicit      timing specified in one or more alternative event sequences.  If      the timer expires and a member of the candidate set of      alternatives is fully satisfied, a timeout completion with full      match is reported.  If the timer expires and part or none of any      candidate alternative is satisfied, a timeout completion with      partial match is reported.   3) If an event is detected before the timer expires, it is mapped to      a digit string symbol and provisionally added to the end of the      current dial string.  The duration of the event (long or not long)      is noted if and only if this is relevant in the current symbol      position (because at least one of the candidate alternative event      sequences includes the "Z" modifier at this position in the      sequence).   4) The current dial string is compared to the candidate alternative      event sequences.  If and only if a sequence expecting a      long-duration event at this position is matched (i.e., the event      had long duration and met the specification for this position),      then any alternative event sequences not specifying a long      duration event at this position are discarded, and the current      dial string is modified by inserting a "Z" in front of the symbol      representing the latest event.   Any sequence expecting a long-      duration event at this position but not matching the observed      event is discarded from the candidate set.  If alternative event      sequences not specifying a long duration event in the givenGroves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 44]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003      position remain in the candidate set after application of the      above rules, the observed event duration is treated as irrelevant      in assessing matches to them.   5) If exactly one candidate remains and it has been fully matched, a      completion event is generated indicating an unambiguous match.  If      no candidates remain, the latest event is removed from the current      dial string and a completion event is generated indicating full      match if one of the candidates from the previous step was fully      satisfied before the latest event was detected, or partial match      otherwise.  The event removed from the current dial string will      then be reported as per the currently active event processing      mechanisms.   6) If no completion event is reported out of step 5, processing      returns to step 2.7.1.14.6 DigitMap Activation   A digit map is activated whenever a new Event descriptor is applied   to the Termination or embedded Event descriptor is activated, and   that Event descriptor contains a digit map completion event.  The   digit map completion event contains an eventDM field in the requested   actions field.  Each new activation of a digit map begins at step 1   of the above procedure, with a clear current dial string.  Any   previous contents of the current dial string from an earlier   activation are lost.   A digit map completion event that does not contain an eventDM field   in its requested actions field is considered an error.  Upon receipt   of such an event in an EventsDescriptor, a MG shall respond with an   error response, including Error 457 - Missing parameter in signal or   event.7.1.14.7 Interaction Of DigitMap and Event Processing   While the digit map is activated, detection is enabled for all events   defined in the package containing the specified digit map completion   event.  Normal event behaviour (e.g., stopping of signals unless the   digit completion event has the KeepActive flag enabled) continues to   apply for each such event detected, except that:   -  the events in the package containing the specified digit map      completion event other than the completion event itself are not      individually notified and have no side-effects unless separately      enabled; andGroves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 45]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   -  an event that triggers a partial match completion event is not      recognized and therefore has no side effects until reprocessed      following the recognition of the digit map completion event.7.1.14.8 Wildcards   Note that if a package contains a digit map completion event, then an   event specification consisting of the package name with a wildcarded   ItemID (Property Name) will activate a digit map; to that end, the   event specification must include an eventDM field according tosection 7.1.14.6.  If the package also contains the digit events   themselves, this form of event specification will cause the   individual events to be reported to the MGC as they are detected.7.1.14.9 Example   As an example, consider the following dial plan:   0                      Local operator   00                     Long-distance operator   xxxx                   Local extension number (starts with 1-7)   8xxxxxxx               Local number   #xxxxxxx               Off-site extension   *xx                    Star services   91xxxxxxxxxx           Long-distance number   9011 + up to 15 digits International number   If the DTMF detection package described in E.6 is used to collect the   dialed digits, then the dialing plan shown above results in the   following digit map:    (0| 00|[1-7]xxx|8xxxxxxx|Fxxxxxxx|Exx|91xxxxxxxxxx|9011x.)7.1.15   Statistics descriptor   The Statistics Descriptor provides information describing the status   and usage of a Termination during its existence within a specific   Context.  There is a set of standard statistics kept for each   Termination where appropriate (number of octets sent and received forGroves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 46]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   example).  The particular statistical properties that are reported   for a given Termination are determined by the Packages realized by   the Termination.  By default, statistics are reported when the   Termination is Subtracted from the Context.  This behaviour can be   overridden by including an empty AuditDescriptor in the Subtract   command.  Statistics may also be returned from the AuditValue   command, or any Add/Move/Modify command using the Audit descriptor.   Statistics are cumulative; reporting Statistics does not reset them.   Statistics are reset when a Termination is Subtracted from a Context.7.1.16   Packages descriptor   Used only with the AuditValue command, the PackageDescriptor returns   a list of Packages realized by the Termination.7.1.17   ObservedEvents descriptor   ObservedEvents is supplied with the Notify command to inform the MGC   of which event(s) were detected.  Used with the AuditValue command,   the ObservedEventsDescriptor returns events in the event buffer which   have not been Notified.  ObservedEvents contains the   RequestIdentifier of the EventsDescriptor that triggered the   notification, the event(s) detected, optionally the detection time(s)   and any parameters of the observed event.  Detection times are   reported with a precision of hundredths of a second.7.1.18   Topology descriptor   A Topology descriptor is used to specify flow directions between   Terminations in a Context.  Contrary to the descriptors in previous   subclauses, the Topology descriptor applies to a Context instead of a   Termination.  The default topology of a Context is that each   Termination's transmission is received by all other Terminations.   The Topology descriptor is optional to implement.  An MG that does   not support Topology descriptors, but receives a command containing   one, returns Error 444 Unsupported or unknown descriptor, and   optionally includes a string containing the name of the unsupported   Descriptor ("Topology") in the error text in the error descriptor.   The Topology descriptor occurs before the commands in an action.  It   is possible to have an action containing only a Topology descriptor,   provided that the Context to which the action applies already exists.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 47]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   A Topology descriptor consists of a sequence of triples of the form   (T1, T2, association).  T1 and T2 specify Terminations within the   Context, possibly using the ALL or CHOOSE wildcard.  The association   specifies how media flows between these two Terminations as follows.   -  (T1, T2, isolate) means that the Terminations matching T2 do not      receive media from the Terminations matching T1, nor vice versa.   -  (T1, T2, oneway) means that the Terminations that match T2 receive      media from the Terminations matching T1, but not vice versa.  In      this case use of the ALL wildcard such that there are Terminations      that match both T1 and T2 is not allowed.   -  (T1, T2, bothway) means that the Terminations matching T2 receive      media from the Terminations matching T1, and vice versa.  In this      case it is allowed to use wildcards such that there are      Terminations that match both T1 and T2.  However, if there is a      Termination that matches both, no loopback is introduced.   CHOOSE wildcards may be used in T1 and T2 as well, under the   following restrictions:   -  the action (see clause 8) of which the topology descriptor is part      contains an Add command in which a CHOOSE wildcard is used;   -  if a CHOOSE wildcard occurs in T1 or T2, then a partial name SHALL      NOT be specified.   The CHOOSE wildcard in a Topology descriptor matches the   TerminationID that the MG assigns in the first Add command that uses   a CHOOSE wildcard in the same action.  An existing Termination that   matches T1 or T2 in the Context to which a Termination is added, is   connected to the newly added Termination as specified by the Topology   descriptor.   If a termination is not mentioned within a Topology Descriptor, any   topology associated with it remains unchanged.  If, however, a new   termination is added into a context its association with the other   terminations within the context defaults to bothway, unless a   Topology Descriptor is given to change this (e.g., if T3 is added to   a context with T1 and T2 with topology (T3, T1, oneway) it will be   connected bothway to T2).   Figure 7 and the table following it show some examples of the effect   of including topology descriptors in actions.  In these examples it   is assumed that the topology descriptors are applied in sequence.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 48]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003     +------------------+  +------------------+  +------------------+     |      +----+      |  |      +----+      |  |      +----+      |     |      | T2 |      |  |      | T2 |      |  |      | T2 |      |     |      +----+      |  |      +----+      |  |      +----+      |     |       ^  ^       |  |          ^       |  |          ^       |     |       |  |       |  |          |       |  |          |       |     |    +--+  +--+    |  |          +---+   |  |          +--+    |     |    |        |    |  |              |   |  |             |    |     |    v        v    |  |              v   |  |             |    |     | +----+    +----+ |  | +----+    +----+ |  | +----+    +----+ |     | | T1 |<-->| T3 | |  | | T1 |<-->| T3 | |  | | T1 |<-->| T3 | |     | +----+    +----+ |  | +----+    +----+ |  | +----+    +----+ |     +------------------+  +------------------+  +------------------+     1. No Topology Desc.   2. T1, T2, Isolate    3. T3, T2, Oneway     +------------------+  +------------------+  +------------------+     |      +----+      |  |      +----+      |  |      +----+      |     |      | T2 |      |  |      | T2 |      |  |      | T2 |      |     |      +----+      |  |      +----+      |  |      +----+      |     |          |       |  |          ^       |  |       ^  ^       |     |          |       |  |          |       |  |       |  |       |     |          +--+    |  |          +---+   |  |    +--+  +--+    |     |             |    |  |              |   |  |    |        |    |     |             v    |  |              v   |  |    v        v    |     | +----+    +----+ |  | +----+    +----+ |  | +----+    +----+ |     | | T1 |<-->| T3 | |  | | T1 |<-->| T3 | |  | | T1 |<-->| T3 | |     | +----+    +----+ |  | +----+    +----+ |  | +----+    +----+ |     +------------------+  +------------------+  +------------------+     4. T2, T3 oneway      5. T2, T3 bothway     6. T1, T2 bothway     Note: the direction of the arrow indicates the direction of flow.                       Figure 7: Example topologies   Topology Description   1 No topology descriptors    When no topology descriptors are                                included, all Terminations have a                                bothway connection to all other                                Terminations.   2 T1, T2 Isolate             Removes the connection between T1 and                                T2.  T3 has a bothway connection with                                both T1 and T2.  T1 and T2 have bothway                                connection to T3.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 49]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   3 T3, T2 oneway              A oneway connection from T3 to T2 (i.e.,                                T2 receives media flow from T3).  A                                bothway connection between T1 and T3.   4 T2, T3 oneway              A oneway connection between T2 to T3.                                T1 and T3 remain bothway connected.   5 T2, T3 bothway             T2 is bothway connected to T3.  This                                results in the same as 2.   6 T1, T2 bothway (T2, T3     All Terminations have a bothway     bothway and T1, T3         connection to all other Terminations.     bothway may be implied or     explicit).   A oneway connection must be implemented in such a way that the other   Terminations in the Context are not aware of the change in topology.7.1.19   Error Descriptor   If a responder encounters an error when processing a transaction   request, it must include an error descriptor in its response.  A   Notify request may contain an error descriptor as well.   An error descriptor consists of an IANA-registered error code,   optionally accompanied by an error text.  H.248.8 contains a list of   valid error codes and error descriptions.   An error descriptor shall be specified at the "deepest level" that is   semantically appropriate for the error being described and that is   possible given any parsing problems with the original request.  An   error descriptor may refer to a syntactical construct other than   where it appears.  For example, Error descriptor 422 - Syntax Error   in Action, could appear within a command even though it refers to the   larger construct - the action - and not the particular command within   which it appears.7.2   Command Application Programming Interface   Following is an Application Programming Interface (API) describing   the Commands of the protocol.  This API is shown to illustrate the   Commands and their parameters and is not intended to specify   implementation (e.g., via use of blocking function calls).  It   describes the input parameters in parentheses after the command name   and the return values in front of the Command.  This is only for   descriptive purposes; the actual Command syntax and encoding areGroves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 50]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   specified in later subclauses.  The order of parameters to commands   is not fixed.  Descriptors may appear as parameters to commands in   any order.  The descriptors SHALL be processed in the order in which   they appear.   Any reply to a command may contain an error descriptor; the API does   not specifically show this.   All parameters enclosed by square brackets ([. . .]) are considered   optional.7.2.1 Add   The Add Command adds a Termination to a Context.     TerminationID     [,MediaDescriptor]     [,ModemDescriptor]     [,MuxDescriptor]     [,EventsDescriptor]     [,SignalsDescriptor]     [,DigitMapDescriptor]     [,ObservedEventsDescriptor]     [,EventBufferDescriptor]     [,StatisticsDescriptor]     [,PackagesDescriptor]       Add( TerminationID        [, MediaDescriptor]        [, ModemDescriptor]        [, MuxDescriptor]        [, EventsDescriptor]        [, EventBufferDescriptor]        [, SignalsDescriptor]        [, DigitMapDescriptor]        [, AuditDescriptor]        )   The TerminationID specifies the Termination to be added to the   Context.  The Termination is either created, or taken from the null   Context.  If a CHOOSE wildcard is used in the TerminationID, the   selected TerminationID will be returned.  Wildcards may be used in an   Add, but such usage would be unusual.  If the wildcard matches more   than one TerminationID, all possible matches are attempted, with   results reported for each one.  The order of attempts when multiple   TerminationIDs match is not specified.   The optional MediaDescriptor describes all media streams.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 51]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   The optional ModemDescriptor and MuxDescriptor specify a modem and   multiplexer if applicable.  For convenience, if a Multiplex   descriptor is present in an Add command and lists any Terminations   that are not currently in the Context, such Terminations are added to   the Context as if individual Add commands listing the Terminations   were invoked. If an error occurs on such an implied Add, error 471 -   Implied Add for Multiplex failure shall be returned and further   processing of the command shall cease.   The EventsDescriptor parameter is optional.  If present, it provides   the list of events that should be detected on the Termination.   The EventBufferDescriptor parameter is optional.  If present, it   provides the list of events that the MG is requested to detect and   buffer when EventBufferControl equals LockStep.   The SignalsDescriptor parameter is optional.  If present, it provides   the list of signals that should be applied to the Termination.   The DigitMapDescriptor parameter is optional.  If present, it defines   a DigitMap definition that may be used in an EventsDescriptor.   The AuditDescriptor is optional.  If present, the command will return   descriptors as specified in the AuditDescriptor.   All descriptors that can be modified could be returned by MG if a   parameter was underspecified or overspecified.  ObservedEvents,   Statistics, and Packages, and the EventBuffer descriptors are   returned only if requested in the AuditDescriptor.   Add SHALL NOT be used on a Termination with a serviceState of   "OutofService".7.2.2 Modify   The Modify Command modifies the properties of a Termination.     TerminationID     [,MediaDescriptor]     [,ModemDescriptor]     [,MuxDescriptor]     [,EventsDescriptor]     [,SignalsDescriptor]     [,DigitMapDescriptor]     [,ObservedEventsDescriptor]     [,EventBufferDescriptor]     [,StatisticsDescriptor]     [,PackagesDescriptor]Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 52]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003      Modify( TerminationID         [, MediaDescriptor]         [, ModemDescriptor]         [, MuxDescriptor]         [, EventsDescriptor]         [, EventBufferDescriptor]         [, SignalsDescriptor]         [, DigitMapDescriptor]         [, AuditDescriptor]         )   The TerminationID may be specific if a single Termination in the   Context is to be modified.  Use of wildcards in the TerminationID may   be appropriate for some operations.  If the wildcard matches more   than one TerminationID, all possible matches are attempted, with   results reported for each one.  The order of attempts when multiple   TerminationIDs match is not specified.  The CHOOSE option is an   error, as the Modify command may only be used on existing   Terminations.   For convenience, if a Multiplex Descriptor is present in a Modify   command, then:   -  if the new Multiplex Descriptor lists any Terminations that are      not currently in the Context, such Terminations are added to the      context as if individual commands listing the Terminations were      invoked.   -  if any Terminations listed previously in the Multiplex Descriptor      are no longer present in the new Multiplex Descriptor, they are      subtracted from the context as if individual Subtract commands      listing the Terminations were invoked.   The remaining parameters to Modify are the same as those to Add.   Possible return values are the same as those to Add.7.2.3 Subtract   The Subtract Command disconnects a Termination from its Context and   returns statistics on the Termination's participation in the Context.     TerminationID     [,MediaDescriptor]     [,ModemDescriptor]     [,MuxDescriptor]     [,EventsDescriptor]     [,SignalsDescriptor]     [,DigitMapDescriptor]Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 53]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003     [,ObservedEventsDescriptor]     [,EventBufferDescriptor]     [,StatisticsDescriptor]     [,PackagesDescriptor]      Subtract(TerminationID         [, AuditDescriptor]         )   TerminationID in the input parameters represents the Termination that   is being subtracted.  The TerminationID may be specific or may be a   wildcard value indicating that all (or a set of related) Terminations   in the Context of the Subtract Command are to be subtracted.  If the   wildcard matches more than one TerminationID, all possible matches   are attempted, with results reported for each one.  The order of   attempts when multiple TerminationIDs match is not specified.   The use of CHOOSE in the TerminationID is an error, as the Subtract   command may only be used on existing Terminations.   ALL may be used as the ContextID as well as the TerminationId in a   Subtract, which would have the effect of deleting all Contexts,   deleting all ephemeral Terminations, and returning all physical   Terminations to Null Context.  Subtract of a termination from the   Null Context is not allowed.   For convenience, if a multiplexing Termination is the object of a   Subtract command, then any bearer Terminations listed in its   Multiplex Descriptor are subtracted from the context as if individual   Subtract commands listing the Terminations were invoked.   By default, the Statistics parameter is returned to report   information collected on the Termination or Terminations specified in   the Command.  The information reported applies to the Termination's   or Terminations' existence in the Context from which it or they are   being subtracted.   The AuditDescriptor is optional.  If present, the command will return   only those descriptors as specified in the AuditDescriptor, which may   be empty.  If omitted, the Statistics descriptor is returned, by   default.  Possible return values are the same as those to Add.   When a provisioned Termination is Subtracted from a Context, its   property values shall revert to:   -  the default value, if specified for the property and not      overridden by provisioning;   -  otherwise, the provisioned value.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 54]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 20037.2.4 Move   The Move Command moves a Termination to another Context from its   current Context in one atomic operation.  The Move command is the   only command that refers to a Termination in a Context different from   that to which the command is applied.  The Move command shall not be   used to move Terminations to or from the null Context.     TerminationID     [,MediaDescriptor]     [,ModemDescriptor]     [,MuxDescriptor]     [,EventsDescriptor]     [,SignalsDescriptor]     [,DigitMapDescriptor]     [,ObservedEventsDescriptor]     [,EventBufferDescriptor]     [,StatisticsDescriptor]     [,PackagesDescriptor]      Move( TerminationID         [, MediaDescriptor]         [, ModemDescriptor]         [, MuxDescriptor]         [, EventsDescriptor]         [, EventBufferDescriptor]         [, SignalsDescriptor]         [, DigitMapDescriptor]         [, AuditDescriptor]         )   The TerminationID specifies the Termination to be moved.  It may be   wildcarded, but CHOOSE shall not be used in the TerminationID.  If   the wildcard matches more than one TerminationID, all possible   matches are attempted, with results reported for each one.  The order   of attempts when multiple TerminationIDs match is not specified.  The   Context to which the Termination is moved is indicated by the target   ContextId in the Action.  If the last remaining Termination is moved   out of a Context, the Context is deleted.   The Move command does not affect the properties of the Termination on   which it operates, except those properties explicitly modified by   descriptors included in the Move command.  The AuditDescriptor with   the Statistics option, for example, would return statistics on the   Termination just prior to the Move.  Possible descriptors returned   from Move are the same as for Add.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 55]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   For convenience, if a multiplexing Termination is the object of a   Move command, then any bearer Terminations listed in its Multiplex   Descriptor are also moved as if individual Move commands listing the   Terminations were invoked.   Move SHALL NOT be used on a Termination with a serviceState of   "OutofService".7.2.5 AuditValue   The AuditValue Command returns the current values of properties,   events, signals and statistics associated with Terminations.   TerminationID   [,MediaDescriptor]   [,ModemDescriptor]   [,MuxDescriptor]   [,EventsDescriptor]   [,SignalsDescriptor]   [,DigitMapDescriptor]   [,ObservedEventsDescriptor]   [,EventBufferDescriptor]   [,StatisticsDescriptor]   [,PackagesDescriptor]     AuditValue(TerminationID,      AuditDescriptor      )   TerminationID may be specific or wildcarded.  If the wildcard matches   more than one TerminationID, all possible matches are attempted, with   results reported for each one.  The order of attempts when multiple   TerminationIDs match is not specified.  If a wildcarded response is   requested, only one command return is generated, with the contents   containing the union of the values of all Terminations matching the   wildcard.  This convention may reduce the volume of data required to   audit a group of Terminations.  Use of CHOOSE is an error.   The appropriate descriptors, with the current values for the   Termination, are returned from AuditValue.  Values appearing in   multiple instances of a descriptor are defined to be alternate values   supported, with each parameter in a descriptor considered   independent.   ObservedEvents returns a list of events in the EventBuffer.  If the   ObservedEventsDescriptor is audited while a DigitMap is active, the   returned ObservedEvents descriptor also includes a digit map   completion event that shows the current dial string but does not show   a Termination method.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 56]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   EventBuffer returns the set of events and associated parameter values   currently enabled in the EventBufferDescriptor.  PackagesDescriptor   returns a list of packages realized by the Termination.   DigitMapDescriptor returns the name or value of the current DigitMap   for the Termination.  DigitMap requested in an AuditValue command   with TerminationID ALL returns all DigitMaps in the gateway.   Statistics returns the current values of all statistics being kept on   the Termination.   Specifying an empty Audit descriptor results in   only the TerminationID being returned.  This may be useful to get a   list of TerminationIDs when used with wildcard.  Annexes A and B   provide a special syntax for presenting such a list in condensed   form, such that the AuditValue command tag does not have to be   repeated for each TerminationID.   AuditValue results depend on the Context, viz. specific, null, or   wildcarded.  (Note that ContextID ALL does not include the null   Context.)  The TerminationID may be specific, or wildcarded.   The following are examples of what is returned in case the context   and/or the termination is wildcarded and a wildcarded response has   been specified.   Assume that the gateway has 4 terminations: t1/1, t1/2, t2/1 and   t2/2.  Assume that terminations t1/* have implemented packages aaa   and bbb and that terminations t2/* have implemented packages ccc and   ddd.  Assume that Context 1 has t1/1 and t2/1 in it and that Context   2 has t1/2 and t2/2 in it.   The command:     Context=1{AuditValue=t1/1{Audit{Packages}}}   Returns:     Context=1{AuditValue=t1/1{Packages{aaa,bbb}}}   The command:     Context=*{AuditValue=t2/*{Audit{Packages}}}   Returns:     Context=1{AuditValue=t2/1{Packages{ccc,ddd}}},     Context=2{AuditValue=t2/2{Packages{ccc,ddd}}}   The command:     Context=*{W-AuditValue=t1/*{Audit{Packages}}}Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 57]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   Returns:     Context=*{W-AuditValue=t1/*{Packages{aaa,bbb}}}   Note: A wildcard response may also be used for other commands such as   Subtract.   The following illustrates other information that can be obtained with   the AuditValue Command:   ContextID TerminationID Information Obtained   Specific  wildcard      Audit of matching Terminations in a Context   Specific  specific      Audit of a single Termination in a Context   Null      Root          Audit of Media Gateway state and events   Null      wildcard      Audit of all matching Terminations in the                            null Context   Null      specific      Audit of a single Termination outside of any                            Context   All       wildcard      Audit of all matching Terminations and the                            Context to which they are associated   All       Root          List of all ContextIds (the ContextID list                            should be returned by using multiple action                            replies, each containing a ContextID from                            the list)   All       Specific      (Non-null) ContextID in which the                            Termination currently existsGroves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 58]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 20037.2.6 AuditCapabilities   The AuditCapabilities Command returns the possible values of   properties, events, signals and statistics associated with   Terminations.     TerminationID     [,MediaDescriptor]     [,ModemDescriptor]     [,MuxDescriptor]     [,EventsDescriptor]     [,SignalsDescriptor]     [,ObservedEventsDescriptor]     [,EventBufferDescriptor]     [,StatisticsDescriptor]      AuditCapabilities(TerminationID,         AuditDescriptor         )   The appropriate descriptors, with the possible values for the   Termination are returned from AuditCapabilities.  Descriptors may be   repeated where there are multiple possible values.  If a wildcarded   response is requested, only one command return is generated, with the   contents containing the union of the values of all Terminations   matching the wildcard.  This convention may reduce the volume of data   required to audit a group of Terminations.   Interpretation of what capabilities are requested for various values   of ContextID and TerminationID is the same as in AuditValue.   The EventsDescriptor returns the list of possible events on the   Termination together with the list of all possible values for the   EventsDescriptor Parameters.  EventBufferDescriptor returns the same   information as EventsDescriptor.  The SignalsDescriptor returns the   list of possible signals that could be applied to the Termination   together with the list of all possible values for the Signals   Parameters.  StatisticsDescriptor returns the names of the statistics   being kept on the termination.  ObservedEventsDescriptor returns the   names of active events on the Termination.  DigitMap and Packages are   not legal in AuditCapability.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 59]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   The following illustrates other information that can be obtained with   the AuditCapabilties Command:   ContextID TerminationID Information Obtained   Specific  wildcard      Audit of matching Terminations in a Context   Specific  specific      Audit of a single Termination in a Context   Null      Root          Audit of MG state and events   Null      wildcard      Audit of all matching Terminations in the                            Null Context   Null      specific      Audit of a single Termination outside of any                            Context   All       wildcard      Audit of all matching Terminations and the                            Context to which they are associated   All       Root          Same as for AuditValue   All       Specific      Same as for AuditValue7.2.7 Notify   The Notify Command allows the Media Gateway to notify the Media   Gateway Controller of events occurring within the Media Gateway.     TerminationID      Notify(TerminationID,         ObservedEventsDescriptor,         [ErrorDescriptor]         )   The TerminationID parameter specifies the Termination issuing the   Notify Command.  The TerminationID shall be a fully qualified name.   The ObservedEventsDescriptor contains the RequestID and a list of   events that the Media Gateway detected in the order that they were   detected.  Each event in the list is accompanied by parameters   associated with the event and optionally an indication of the time   that the event was detected.  Procedures for sending Notify commands   with RequestID equal to 0 are for further study.   Notify Commands with RequestID not equal to 0 shall occur only as the   result of detection of an event specified by an Events descriptor   which is active on the Termination concerned.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 60]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   The RequestID returns the RequestID parameter of the EventsDescriptor   that triggered the Notify Command.  It is used to correlate the   notification with the request that triggered it.  The events in the   list must have been requested via the triggering EventsDescriptor or   embedded events descriptor unless the RequestID is 0 (which is for   further study).   The ErrorDescriptor may be sent in the Notify Command as a result of   Error 518 - Event buffer full.7.2.8 ServiceChange   The ServiceChange Command allows the Media Gateway to notify the   Media Gateway Controller that a Termination or group of Terminations   is about to be taken out of service or has just been returned to   service.  The Media Gateway Controller may indicate that   Termination(s) shall be taken out of or returned to service.   The   Media Gateway may notify the MGC that the capability of a Termination   has changed.  It also allows a MGC to hand over control of a MG to   another MGC.   TerminationID,     [ServiceChangeDescriptor]      ServiceChange ( TerminationID,         ServiceChangeDescriptor         )   The TerminationID parameter specifies the Termination(s) that are   taken out of or returned to service.  Wildcarding of Termination   names is permitted, with the exception that the CHOOSE mechanism   shall not be used.  Use of the "Root" TerminationID indicates a   ServiceChange affecting the entire Media Gateway.   The ServiceChangeDescriptor contains the following parameters as   required:   -  ServiceChangeMethod   -  ServiceChangeReason   -  ServiceChangeDelay   -  ServiceChangeAddress   -  ServiceChangeProfile   -  ServiceChangeVersion   -  ServiceChangeMgcId   -  TimeStampGroves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 61]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   The ServiceChangeMethod parameter specifies the type of ServiceChange   that will or has occurred:   1) Graceful - indicates that the specified Terminations will be taken      out of service after the specified ServiceChangeDelay; established      connections are not yet affected, but the Media Gateway Controller      should refrain from establishing new connections and should      attempt to gracefully tear down existing connections on the      Termination(s) affected by the serviceChange command.  The MG      should set Termination serviceState at the expiry of      ServiceChangeDelay or the removal of the Termination from an      active Context (whichever is first), to "out of service".   2) Forced - indicates that the specified Terminations were taken      abruptly out of service and any established connections associated      with them may be lost.  For non-Root terminations, the MGC is      responsible for cleaning up the Context (if any) with which the      failed Termination is associated.  At a minimum the Termination      shall be subtracted from the Context.  The Termination      serviceState should be "out of service".  For the root      termination, the MGC can assume that all connections are lost on      the MG and thus can consider that all the terminations have been      subtracted.   3) Restart - indicates that service will be restored on the specified      Terminations after expiration of the ServiceChangeDelay.  The      serviceState should be set to "inService" upon expiry of      ServiceChangeDelay.   4) Disconnected - always applied with the Root TerminationID,      indicates that the MG lost communication with the MGC, but it was      subsequently restored to the same MGC (possibly after trying other      MGCs on a pre-provisioned list).  Since MG state may have changed,      the MGC may wish to use the Audit command to resynchronize its      state with the MG's.   5) Handoff - sent from the MGC to the MG, this reason indicates that      the MGC is going out of service and a new MGC association must be      established.  Sent from the MG to the MGC, this indicates that the      MG is attempting to establish a new association in accordance with      a Handoff received from the MGC with which it was previously      associated.   6) Failover - sent from MG to MGC to indicate the primary MG is out      of service and a secondary MG is taking over.  This serviceChange      method is also sent from the MG to the MGC when the MG detects      that MGC has failed.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 62]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   7) Another value whose meaning is mutually understood between the MG      and the MGC.   The ServiceChangeReason parameter specifies the reason why the   ServiceChange has or will occur.  It consists of an alphanumeric   token (IANA registered) and, optionally, an explanatory string.   The optional ServiceChangeAddress parameter specifies the address   (e.g., IP port number for IP networks) to be used for subsequent   communications.  It can be specified in the input parameter   descriptor or the returned result descriptor.  ServiceChangeAddress   and ServiceChangeMgcId parameters must not both be present in the   ServiceChangeDescriptor or the ServiceChangeResultDescriptor.  The   ServiceChangeAddress provides an address to be used within the   Context of the association currently being negotiated, while the   ServiceChangeMgcId provides an alternate address where the MG should   seek to establish another association.  Note that the use of   ServiceChangeAddress is not encouraged.  MGCs and MGs must be able to   cope with the ServiceChangeAddress being either a full address or   just a port number in the case of TCP transports.   The optional ServiceChangeDelay parameter is expressed in seconds.   If the delay is absent or set to zero, the delay value should be   considered to be null.  In the case of a "graceful"   ServiceChangeMethod, a null delay indicates that the Media Gateway   Controller should wait for the natural removal of existing   connections and should not establish new connections.  For "graceful"   only, a null delay means the MG must not set serviceState "out of   service" until the Termination is in the null Context.   The optional ServiceChangeProfile parameter specifies the Profile (if   any) of the protocol supported.  The ServiceChangeProfile includes   the version of the profile supported.   The optional ServiceChangeVersion parameter contains the protocol   version and is used if protocol version negotiation occurs (see   11.3).   The optional TimeStamp parameter specifies the actual time as kept by   the sender.  As such, it is not necessarily absolute time according   to, for example, a local time zone - it merely establishes an   arbitrary starting time against which all future timestamps   transmitted by a sender during this association shall be compared.   It can be used by the responder to determine how its notion of time   differs from that of its correspondent.  TimeStamp is sent with a   precision of hundredths of a second.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 63]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   The optional Extension parameter may contain any value whose meaning   is mutually understood by the MG and MGC.   A ServiceChange Command specifying the "Root" for the TerminationID   and ServiceChangeMethod equal to Restart is a registration command by   which a Media Gateway announces its existence to the Media Gateway   Controller.  The Media Gateway may also announce a registration   command by specifying the "Root" for the TerminationID and   ServiceChangeMethod equal to Failover when the MG detects MGC   failures.  The Media Gateway is expected to be provisioned with the   name of one primary and optionally some number of alternate Media   Gateway Controllers.  Acknowledgement of the ServiceChange Command   completes the registration process, except when the MGC has returned   an alternative ServiceChangeMgcId as described in the following   paragraph.  The MG may specify the transport ServiceChangeAddress to   be used by the MGC for sending messages in the ServiceChangeAddress   parameter in the input ServiceChangeDescriptor.  The MG may specify   an address in the ServiceChangeAddress parameter of the ServiceChange   request, and the MGC may also do so in the ServiceChange reply.  In   either case, the recipient must use the supplied address as the   destination for all subsequent transaction requests within the   association.  At the same time, as indicated in clause 9, transaction   replies and pending indications must be sent to the address from   which the corresponding requests originated.  This must be done even   if it implies extra messaging because commands and responses cannot   be packed together.  The TimeStamp parameter shall be sent with a   registration command and its response.   The Media Gateway Controller may return a ServiceChangeMgcId   parameter that describes the Media Gateway Controller that should   preferably be contacted for further service by the Media Gateway.  In   this case the Media Gateway shall reissue the ServiceChange command   to the new Media Gateway Controller.  The MGC specified in a   ServiceChangeMgcId, if provided, shall be contacted before any   further alternate MGCs.  On a HandOff message from MGC to MG, the   ServiceChangeMgcId is the new MGC that will take over from the   current MGC.   The return from ServiceChange is empty except when the Root   terminationID is used.  In that case it includes the following   parameters as required:   -  ServiceChangeAddress, if the responding MGC wishes to specify a      new destination for messages from the MG for the remainder of the      association;   -  ServiceChangeMgcId, if the responding MGC does not wish to sustain      an association with the MG;Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 64]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   -  ServiceChangeProfile, if the responder wishes to negotiate the      profile to be used for the association;   -  ServiceChangeVersion, if the responder wishes to negotiate the      version of the protocol to be used for the association.   The following ServiceChangeReasons are defined.  This list may be   extended by an IANA registration as outlined in 13.3.      900 Service Restored      901 Cold Boot      902 Warm Boot      903 MGC Directed Change      904 Termination malfunctioning      905 Termination taken out of service      906 Loss of lower layer connectivity (e.g., downstream sync)      907 Transmission Failure      908 MG Impending Failure      909 MGC Impending Failure      910 Media Capability Failure      911 Modem Capability Failure      912 Mux Capability Failure      913 Signal Capability Failure      914 Event Capability Failure      915 State Loss7.2.9 Manipulating and Auditing Context Attributes   The commands of the protocol as discussed in the preceding subclauses   apply to Terminations.  This subclause specifies how Contexts are   manipulated and audited.   Commands are grouped into actions (see clause 8).  An action applies   to one Context.  In addition to commands, an action may contain   Context manipulation and auditing instructions.   An action request sent to a MG may include a request to audit   attributes of a Context.  An action may also include a request to   change the attributes of a Context.   The Context properties that may be included in an action reply are   used to return information to a MGC.  This can be information   requested by an audit of Context attributes or details of the effect   of manipulation of a Context.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 65]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   If a MG receives an action which contains both a request to audit   context attributes and a request to manipulate those attributes, the   response SHALL include the values of the attributes after processing   the manipulation request.7.2.10   Generic Command Syntax   The protocol can be encoded in a binary format or in a text format.   MGCs should support both encoding formats.  MGs may support both   formats.   The protocol syntax for the binary format of the protocol is defined   in Annex A.  Annex C specifies the encoding of the Local and Remote   descriptors for use with the binary format.   A complete ABNF of the text encoding of the protocol perRFC 2234 is   given in Annex B.  SDP is used as the encoding of the Local and   Remote descriptors for use with the text encoding as modified in   7.1.8.7.3   Command Error Codes   Errors consist of an IANA registered error code and an explanatory   string.  Sending the explanatory string is optional.  Implementations   are encouraged to append diagnostic information to the end of the   string.   When a MG reports an error to a MGC, it does so in an error   descriptor.  An error descriptor consists of an error code and   optionally the associated explanatory string.   H.248.8 contains the error codes supported by Recommendations in the   H.248 sub-series.8  Transactions   Commands between the Media Gateway Controller and the Media Gateway   are grouped into Transactions, each of which is identified by a   TransactionID.  Transactions consist of one or more Actions.  An   Action consists of a non-empty series of Commands, Context property   modifications, or Context property audits that are limited to   operating within a single Context.  Consequently, each Action   typically specifies a ContextID.  However, there are two   circumstances where a specific ContextID is not provided with an   Action.  One is the case of modification of a Termination outside of   a Context.  The other is where the controller requests the gateway to   create a new Context.  Figure 8 is a graphic representation of the   Transaction, Action and Command relationships.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 66]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003      +----------------------------------------------------------+      | Transaction x                                            |      |  +----------------------------------------------------+  |      |  | Action 1                                           |  |      |  | +---------+  +---------+  +---------+  +---------+ |  |      |  | | Command |  | Command |  | Command |  | Command | |  |      |  | |    1    |  |    2    |  |    3    |  |    4    | |  |      |  | +---------+  +---------+  +---------+  +---------+ |  |      |  +----------------------------------------------------+  |      |                                                          |      |  +----------------------------------------------------+  |      |  | Action 2                                           |  |      |  | +---------+                                        |  |      |  | | Command |                                        |  |      |  | |    1    |                                        |  |      |  | +---------+                                        |  |      |  +----------------------------------------------------+  |      |                                                          |      |  +----------------------------------------------------+  |      |  | Action 3                                           |  |      |  | +---------+  +---------+  +---------+              |  |      |  | | Command |  | Command |  | Command |              |  |      |  | |    1    |  |    2    |  |    3    |              |  |      |  | +---------+  +---------+  +---------+              |  |      |  +----------------------------------------------------+  |      +----------------------------------------------------------+               Figure 8: Transactions, Actions and Commands   Transactions are presented as TransactionRequests.  Corresponding   responses to a TransactionRequest are received in a single reply,   possibly preceded by a number of TransactionPending messages (see   8.2.3).   Transactions guarantee ordered Command processing.  That is, Commands   within a Transaction are executed sequentially.  Ordering of   Transactions is NOT guaranteed - transactions may be executed in any   order, or simultaneously.   At the first failing Command in a Transaction, processing of the   remaining Commands in that Transaction stops.  If a command contains   a wildcarded TerminationID, the command is attempted with each of the   actual TerminationIDs matching the wildcard.  A response within the   TransactionReply is included for each matching TerminationID, even if   one or more instances generated an error.  If any TerminationID   matching a wildcard results in an error when executed, any commands   following the wildcarded command are not attempted.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 67]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   Commands may be marked as "Optional" which can override this   behaviour - if a command marked as Optional results in an error,   subsequent commands in the Transaction will be executed.  If a   command fails, the MG shall as far as possible restore the state that   existed prior to the attempted execution of the command before   continuing with command processing.   A TransactionReply includes the results for all of the Commands in   the corresponding TransactionRequest.  The TransactionReply includes   the return values for the Commands that were executed successfully,   and the Command and error descriptor for any Command that failed.   TransactionPending is used to periodically notify the receiver that a   Transaction has not completed yet, but is actively being processed.   Applications SHOULD implement an application level timer per   transaction.  Expiration of the timer should cause a retransmission   of the request.  Receipt of a Reply should cancel the timer.  Receipt   of Pending should restart the timer.8.1   Common parameters8.1.1 Transaction Identifiers   Transactions are identified by a TransactionID, which is assigned by   sender and is unique within the scope of the sender.  A response   containing an error descriptor to indicate that the TransactionID is   missing in a request shall use TransactionID 0 in the corresponding   TransactionReply.8.1.2 Context Identifiers   Contexts are identified by a ContextID, which is assigned by the   Media Gateway and is unique within the scope of the Media Gateway.   The Media Gateway Controller shall use the ContextID supplied by the   Media Gateway in all subsequent Transactions relating to that   Context.  The protocol makes reference to a distinguished value that   may be used by the Media Gateway Controller when referring to a   Termination that is currently not associated with a Context, namely   the null ContextID.   The CHOOSE wildcard is used to request that the Media Gateway create   a new Context.   The MGC may use the ALL wildcard to address all Contexts on the MG.   The null Context is not included when the ALL wildcard is used.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 68]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   The MGC shall not use partially specified ContextIDs containing the   CHOOSE or ALL wildcards.8.2   Transaction Application Programming Interface   Following is an Application Programming Interface (API) describing   the Transactions of the protocol.  This API is shown to illustrate   the Transactions and their parameters and is not intended to specify   implementation (e.g., via use of blocking function calls).  It will   describe the input parameters and return values expected to be used   by the various Transactions of the protocol from a very high level.   Transaction syntax and encodings are specified in later subclauses.8.2.1 TransactionRequest   The TransactionRequest is invoked by the sender.  There is one   Transaction per request invocation.  A request contains one or more   Actions, each of which specifies its target Context and one or more   Commands per Context.     TransactionRequest(TransactionId {         ContextID {Command ... Command},            . . .         ContextID {Command ... Command } })   The TransactionID parameter must specify a value for later   correlation with the TransactionReply or TransactionPending response   from the receiver.   The ContextID parameter must specify a value to pertain to all   Commands that follow up to either the next specification of a   ContextID parameter or the end of the TransactionRequest, whichever   comes first.   The Command parameter represents one of the Commands mentioned in 7.2   (Command Application Programming Interface).8.2.2 TransactionReply   The TransactionReply is invoked by the receiver.  There is one reply   invocation per transaction.  A reply contains one or more Actions,   each of which must specify its target Context and one or more   Responses per Context.  The TransactionReply is invoked by the   responder when it has processed the TransactionRequest.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 69]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   A TransactionRequest has been processed:   -  when all actions in that TransactionRequest have been processed;      or   -  when an error is encountered in processing that      TransactionRequest, except when the error is in an optional      command.   A command has been processed when all descriptors in that command   have been processed.   A SignalsDescriptor is considered to have been processed when it has   been established that the descriptor is syntactically valid, the   requested signals are supported and they have been queued to be   applied.   An EventsDescriptor or EventBufferDescriptor is considered to have   been processed when it has been established that the descriptor is   syntactically valid, the requested events can be observed, any   embedded signals can be generated, any embedded events can be   detected, and the MG has been brought into a state in which the   events will be detected.     TransactionReply(TransactionID {         ContextID { Response ... Response },            . . .         ContextID { Response ... Response } })   The TransactionID parameter must be the same as that of the   corresponding TransactionRequest.   The ContextID parameter must specify a value to pertain to all   Responses for the action.  The ContextID may be specific, all or   null.   Each of the Response parameters represents a return value as   mentioned in 7.2, or an error descriptor if the command execution   encountered an error.  Commands after the point of failure are not   processed and, therefore, Responses are not issued for them.   An exception to this occurs if a command has been marked as optional   in the Transaction request.  If the optional command generates an   error, the transaction still continues to execute, so the Reply   would, in this case, have Responses after an Error.Section 7.1.19 Error Descriptor specifies the generation of error   descriptors.  The text below discusses several individual cases.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 70]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   If the receiver encounters an error in processing a ContextID, the   requested Action response will consist of the Context ID and a single   error descriptor, 422 - Syntax Error in Action.   If the receiver encounters an error such that it cannot determine a   legal Action, it will return a TransactionReply consisting of the   TransactionID and a single error descriptor, 422 - Syntax Error in   Action.  If the end of an action cannot be reliably determined but   one or more commands can be parsed, it will process them and then   send 422 - Syntax Error in Action as the last action for the   transaction.  If the receiver encounters an error such that is cannot   determine a legal Transaction, it will return a TransactionReply with   a null TransactionID and a single error descriptor (403 - Syntax   Error in TransactionRequest).   If the end of a transaction cannot be reliably determined and one or   more Actions can be parsed, it will process them and then return 403   - Syntax Error in Transaction as the last action reply for the   transaction.  If no Actions can be parsed, it will return 403 -   Syntax Error in TransactionRequest as the only reply.   If the terminationID cannot be reliably determined, it will send 442   - Syntax Error in Command as the action reply.   If the end of a command cannot be reliably determined, it will return   442 - Syntax Error in Command as the reply to the last action it can   parse.8.2.3 TransactionPending   The receiver invokes the TransactionPending.  A TransactionPending   indicates that the Transaction is actively being processed, but has   not been completed.  It is used to prevent the sender from assuming   the TransactionRequest was lost where the Transaction will take some   time to complete.     TransactionPending(TransactionID { } )   The TransactionID parameter must be the same as that of the   corresponding TransactionRequest.  A property of root   (normalMGExecutionTime) is settable by the MGC to indicate the   interval within which the MGC expects a response to any transaction   from the MG.  Another property (normalMGCExecutionTime) is settable   by the MGC to indicate the interval within which the MG should expect   a response to any transaction from the MGC.  Senders may receive more   than one TransactionPending for a command.  If a duplicate request isGroves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 71]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   received when pending, the responder may send a duplicate pending   immediately, or continue waiting for its timer to trigger another   TransactionPending.8.3   Messages   Multiple Transactions can be concatenated into a Message.  Messages   have a header, which includes the identity of the sender.  The   Message Identifier (MID) of a message is set to a provisioned name   (e.g., domain address/domain name/device name) of the entity   transmitting the message.  Domain name is a suggested default.  An   H.248.1 entity (MG/MGC) must consistently use the same MID in all   messages it originates for the duration of control association with   the peer (MGC/MG).   Every Message contains a Version Number identifying the version of   the protocol the message conforms to.  Versions consist of one or two   digits, beginning with version 1 for the present version of the   protocol.   The transactions in a message are treated independently.  There is no   order implied; there is no application or protocol acknowledgement of   a message.  A message is essentially a transport mechanism.  For   example, message X containing transaction requests A, B, and C may be   responded to with message Y containing replies to A and C and message   Z containing the reply to B.  Likewise, message L containing request   D and message M containing request E may be responded to with message   N containing replies to both D and E.9  Transport   The transport mechanism for the protocol should allow the reliable   transport of transactions between a MGC and MG.  The transport shall   remain independent of what particular commands are being sent and   shall be applicable to all application states.  There are several   transports defined for the protocol, which are defined in Annexes to   this RFC and other Recommendations of the H.248   sub-series.  Additional Transports may be defined as additional   Recommendations of the H.248 sub-series.  For transport of the   protocol over IP, MGCs shall implement both TCP and UDP/ALF, a MG   shall implement TCP or UDP/ALF or both.   The MG is provisioned with a name or address (such as DNS name or IP   address) of a primary and zero or more secondary MGCs (see 7.2.8)   that is the address the MG uses to send messages to the MGC.  If TCP   or UDP is used as the protocol transport and the port to which the   initial ServiceChange request is to be sent is not otherwise known,Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 72]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   that request should be sent to the default port number for the   protocol.  This port number is 2944 for text-encoded operation or   2945 for binary-encoded operation, for either UDP or TCP.  The MGC   receives the message containing the ServiceChange request from the MG   and can determine the MG's address from it.  As described in 7.2.8,   either the MG or the MGC may supply an address in the   ServiceChangeAddress parameter to which subsequent transaction   requests must be addressed, but responses (including the response to   the initial ServiceChange request) must always be sent back to the   address which was the source of the corresponding request.  For   example, in IP networks, this is the source address in the IP header   and the source port number in the TCP/UDP/SCTP header.9.1   Ordering of Commands   This RFC does not mandate that the underlying transport protocol   guarantees the sequencing of transactions sent to an entity.  This   property tends to maximize the timeliness of actions, but it has a   few drawbacks.  For example:   -  Notify commands may be delayed and arrive at the MGC after the      transmission of a new command changing the EventsDescriptor.   -  If a new command is transmitted before a previous one is      acknowledged, there is no guarantee that prior command will be      executed before the new one.   Media Gateway Controllers that want to guarantee consistent operation   of the Media Gateway may use the following rules.  These rules are   with respect to commands that are in different transactions.   Commands that are in the same transaction are executed in order (see   clause 8).   1) When a Media Gateway handles several Terminations, commands      pertaining to the different Terminations may be sent in parallel,      for example following a model where each Termination (or group of      Terminations) is controlled by its own process or its own thread.   2) On a Termination, there should normally be at most one outstanding      command (Add or Modify or Move), unless the outstanding commands      are in the same transaction.  However, a Subtract command may be      issued at any time.  In consequence, a Media Gateway may sometimes      receive a Modify command that applies to a previously subtracted      Termination.  Such commands should be ignored, and an error code      should be returned.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 73]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   3) For transports that do not guarantee in-sequence delivery of      messages (i.e., UDP), there should normally be on a given      Termination at most one outstanding Notify command at any time.   4) In some cases, an implicitly or explicitly wildcarded Subtract      command that applies to a group of Terminations may step in front      of a pending Add command.  The Media Gateway Controller should      individually delete all Terminations for which an Add command was      pending at the time of the global Subtract command.  Also, new Add      commands for Terminations named by the wildcarding (or implied in      a Multiplex descriptor) should not be sent until the wildcarded      Subtract command is acknowledged.   5) AuditValue and AuditCapability are not subject to any sequencing.   6) ServiceChange shall always be the first command sent by a MG as      defined by the restart procedure.  Any other command or response      must be delivered after this ServiceChange command.   These rules do not affect the command responder, which should always   respond to commands.9.2   Protection against Restart Avalanche   In the event that a large number of Media Gateways are powered on   simultaneously and they were to all initiate a ServiceChange   transaction, the Media Gateway Controller would very likely be   swamped, leading to message losses and network congestion during the   critical period of service restoration.  In order to prevent such   avalanches, the following behaviour is suggested:   1) When a Media Gateway is powered on, it should initiate a restart      timer to a random value, uniformly distributed between 0 and a      maximum waiting delay (MWD).  Care should be taken to avoid      synchronicity of the random number generation between multiple      Media Gateways that would use the same algorithm.   2) The Media Gateway should then wait for either the end of this      timer or the detection of a local user activity, such as for      example an off-hook transition on a residential Media Gateway.   3) When the timer elapses, or when an activity is detected, the Media      Gateway should initiate the restart procedure.   The restart procedure simply requires the MG to guarantee that the   first message that the Media Gateway Controller sees from this MG is   a ServiceChange message informing the Media Gateway Controller about   the restart.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 74]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003     NOTE - The value of MWD is a configuration parameter that depends     on the type of the Media Gateway.  The following reasoning may be     used to determine the value of this delay on residential gateways.   Media Gateway Controllers are typically dimensioned to handle the   peak hour traffic load, during which, in average, 10% of the lines   will be busy, placing calls whose average duration is typically 3   minutes.  The processing of a call typically involves 5 to 6 Media   Gateway Controller transactions between each Media Gateway and the   Media Gateway Controller.  This simple calculation shows that the   Media Gateway Controller is expected to handle 5 to 6 transactions   for each Termination, every 30 minutes on average, or, to put it   otherwise, about one transaction per Termination every 5 to 6 minutes   on average.  This suggests that a reasonable value of MWD for a   residential gateway would be 10 to 12 minutes.  In the absence of   explicit configuration, residential gateways should adopt a value of   600 seconds for MWD.   The same reasoning suggests that the value of MWD should be much   shorter for trunking gateways or for business gateways, because they   handle a large number of Terminations, and also because the usage   rate of these Terminations is much higher than 10% during the peak   busy hour, a typical value being 60%.  These Terminations, during the   peak hour, are this expected to contribute about one transaction per   minute to the Media Gateway Controller load.  A reasonable algorithm   is to make the value of MWD per "trunk" Termination six times shorter   than the MWD per residential gateway, and also inversely proportional   to the number of Terminations that are being restarted.  For example   MWD should be set to 2.5 seconds for a gateway that handles a T1   line, or to 60 milliseconds for a gateway that handles a T3 line.10 Security Considerations   This clause covers security when using the protocol in an IP   environment.10.1  Protection of Protocol Connections   A security mechanism is clearly needed to prevent unauthorized   entities from using the protocol defined in this RFC for setting up   unauthorized calls or interfering with authorized calls.  The   security mechanism for the protocol when transported over IP networks   is IPsec [RFC 2401 toRFC 2411].   The AH header [RFC 2402] affords data origin authentication,   connectionless integrity and optional anti-replay protection of   messages passed between the MG and the MGC.  The ESP header [RFC   2406] provides confidentiality of messages, if desired.  ForGroves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 75]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   instance, the ESP encryption service should be requested if the   session descriptions are used to carry session keys, as defined in   SDP.   Implementations of the protocol defined in this RFC employing the ESP   header SHALL comply withsection 5 of [RFC 2406], which defines a   minimum set of algorithms for integrity checking and encryption.   Similarly, implementations employing the AH header SHALL comply withsection 5 of [RFC 2402], which defines a minimum set of algorithms   for integrity checking using manual keys.   Implementations SHOULD use IKE [RFC 2409] to permit more robust   keying options.  Implementations employing IKE SHOULD support   authentication with RSA signatures and RSA public key encryption.10.2  Interim AH scheme   Implementation of IPsec requires that the AH or ESP header be   inserted immediately after the IP header.  This cannot be easily done   at the application level.  Therefore, this presents a deployment   problem for the protocol defined in this RFC where the underlying   network implementation does not support IPsec.   As an interim solution, an optional AH header is defined within the   H.248.1 protocol header.  The header fields are exactly those of the   SPI, SEQUENCE NUMBER and DATA fields as defined in [RFC 2402].  The   semantics of the header fields are the same as the "transport mode"   of [RFC 2402], except for the calculation of the Integrity Check   Value (ICV).  In IPsec, the ICV is calculated over the entire IP   packet including the IP header.  This prevents spoofing of the IP   addresses.  To retain the same functionality, the ICV calculation   should be performed across all the transactions (concatenated) in the   message prepended by a synthesized IP header consisting of a 32-bit   source IP address, a 32-bit destination address and a 16-bit UDP   destination port encoded as 20 hex digits.  When the interim AH   mechanism is employed when TCP is the transport Layer, the UDP Port   above becomes the TCP port, and all other operations are the same.   Implementations of the H.248.1 protocol SHALL implement IPsec where   the underlying operating system and the transport network supports   IPsec.  Implementations of the protocol using IPv4 SHALL implement   the interim AH scheme.  However, this interim scheme SHALL NOT be   used when the underlying network layer supports IPsec.  IPv6   implementations are assumed to support IPsec and SHALL NOT use the   interim AH scheme.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 76]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   All implementations of the interim AH mechanism SHALL comply withsection 5 of RFC 2402 which defines a minimum set of algorithms for   integrity checking using manual keys.   The interim AH interim scheme does not provide protection against   eavesdropping, thus forbidding third parties from monitoring the   connections set up by a given Termination.  Also, it does not provide   protection against replay attacks.  These procedures do not   necessarily protect against denial of service attacks by misbehaving   MGs or misbehaving MGCs.  However, they will provide an   identification of these misbehaving entities, which should then be   deprived of their authorization through maintenance procedures.10.3  Protection of Media Connections   The protocol allows the MGC to provide MGs with "session keys" that   can be used to encrypt the audio messages, protecting against   eavesdropping.   A specific problem of packet networks is "uncontrolled barge-in".   This attack can be performed by directing media packets to the IP   address and UDP port used by a connection.  If no protection is   implemented, the packets must be decompressed and the signals must be   played on the "line side".   A basic protection against this attack is to only accept packets from   known sources, checking for example that the IP source address and   UDP source port match the values announced in the Remote descriptor.   This has two inconveniences: it slows down connection establishment   and it can be fooled by source spoofing:   -  To enable the address-based protection, the MGC must obtain the      remote session description of the egress MG and pass it to the      ingress MG.  This requires at least one network round trip, and      leaves us with a dilemma: either allow the call to proceed without      waiting for the round trip to complete, and risk for example,      "clipping" a remote announcement, or wait for the full round trip      and settle for slower call-set up procedures.   -  Source spoofing is only effective if the attacker can obtain valid      pairs of source destination addresses and ports, for example by      listening to a fraction of the traffic.  To fight source spoofing,      one could try to control all access points to the network.  But      this is in practice very hard to achieve.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 77]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   An alternative to checking the source address is to encrypt and   authenticate the packets, using a secret key that is conveyed during   the call set-up procedure.  This will not slow down the call set-up,   and provides strong protection against address spoofing.11 MG-MGC Control Interface   The control association between MG and MGC is initiated at MG cold   start, and announced by a ServiceChange message, but can be changed   by subsequent events, such as failures or manual service events.   While the protocol does not have an explicit mechanism to support   multiple MGCs controlling a physical MG, it has been designed to   support the multiple logical MG (within a single physical MG) that   can be associated with different MGCs.11.1  Multiple Virtual MGs   A physical Media Gateway may be partitioned into one or more Virtual   MGs.  A virtual MG consists of a set of statically partitioned   physical Terminations and/or sets of ephemeral Terminations.  A   physical Termination is controlled by one MGC.  The model does not   require that other resources be statically allocated, just   Terminations.  The mechanism for allocating Terminations to virtual   MGs is a management method outside the scope of the protocol.  Each   of the virtual MGs appears to the MGC as a complete MG client.   A physical MG may have only one network interface, which must be   shared across virtual MGs.  In such a case, the packet/cell side   Termination is shared.  It should be noted however, that in use, such   interfaces require an ephemeral instance of the Termination to be   created per flow, and thus sharing the Termination is   straightforward.  This mechanism does lead to a complication, namely   that the MG must always know which of its controlling MGCs should be   notified if an event occurs on the interface.   In normal operation, the Virtual MG will be instructed by the MGC to   create network flows (if it is the originating side), or to expect   flow requests (if it is the terminating side), and no confusion will   arise.  However, if an unexpected event occurs, the Virtual MG must   know what to do with respect to the physical resources it is   controlling.   If recovering from the event requires manipulation of a physical   interface's state, only one MGC should do so.  These issues are   resolved by allowing any of the MGCs to create EventsDescriptors to   be notified of such events, but only one MGC can have read/writeGroves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 78]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   access to the physical interface properties; all other MGCs have   read-only access.  The management mechanism is used to designate   which MGC has read/write capability, and is designated the Master   MGC.   Each virtual MG has its own Root Termination.  In most cases the   values for the properties of the Root Termination are independently   settable by each MGC.  Where there can only be one value, the   parameter is read-only to all but the Master MGC.   ServiceChange may only be applied to a Termination or set of   Terminations partitioned to the Virtual MG or created (in the case of   ephemeral Terminations) by that Virtual MG.11.2  Cold start   A MG is pre-provisioned by a management mechanism outside the scope   of this protocol with a primary and (optionally) an ordered list of   secondary MGCs.  Upon a cold start of the MG, it will issue a   ServiceChange command with a "Restart" method, on the Root   Termination to its primary MGC.  If the MGC accepts the MG, it sends   a Transaction Reply not including a ServiceChangeMgcId parameter.  If   the MGC does not accept the MG's registration, it sends a Transaction   Reply, providing the address of an alternate MGC to be contacted by   including a ServiceChangeMgcId parameter.   If the MG receives a Transaction Reply that includes a   ServiceChangeMgcId parameter, it sends a ServiceChange to the MGC   specified in the ServiceChangeMgcId.  It continues this process until   it gets a controlling MGC to accept its registration, or it fails to   get a reply.  Upon failure to obtain a reply, either from the primary   MGC, or a designated successor, the MG tries its pre-provisioned   secondary MGCs, in order.  If the MG is unable to establish a control   relationship with any MGC, it shall wait a random amount of time as   described in 9.2 and then start contacting its primary, and if   necessary, its secondary MGCs again.   It is possible that the reply to a ServiceChange with Restart will be   lost, and a command will be received by the MG prior to the receipt   of the ServiceChange response.  The MG shall issue Error 505 -   Command Received before a ServiceChange Reply has been received.11.3  Negotiation of protocol version   The first ServiceChange command from a MG shall contain the version   number of the protocol supported by the MG in the   ServiceChangeVersion parameter.  Upon receiving such a message, if   the MGC supports only a lower version, then the MGC shall send aGroves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 79]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   ServiceChangeReply with the lower version and thereafter all the   messages between MG and MGC shall conform to the lower version of the   protocol.  If the MG is unable to comply and it has established a   transport connection to the MGC, it should close that connection.  In   any event, it should reject all subsequent requests from the MGC with   error 406 - Version Not Supported.   If the MGC supports a higher version than the MG but is able to   support the lower version proposed by the MG, it shall send a   ServiceChangeReply with the lower version and thereafter all the   messages between MG and MGC shall conform to the lower version of the   protocol.  If the MGC is unable to comply, it shall reject the   association, with error 406 - Version Not Supported.   Protocol version negotiation may also occur at "handoff" and   "failover" ServiceChanges.   When extending the protocol with new versions, the following rules   should be followed:   1) Existing protocol elements, i.e., procedures, parameters,      descriptor, property, values, should not be changed unless a      protocol error needs to be corrected or it becomes necessary to      change the operation of the service that is being supported by the      protocol.   2) The semantics of a command, a parameter, a descriptor, a property,      or a value should not be changed.   3) Established rules for formatting and encoding messages and      parameters should not be modified.   4) When information elements are found to be obsolete they can be      marked as not used.  However, the identifier for that information      element will be marked as reserved.  In that way it can not be      used in future versions.11.4  Failure of a MG   If a MG fails, but is capable of sending a message to the MGC, it   sends a ServiceChange with an appropriate method (graceful or forced)   and specifies the Root TerminationID.  When it returns to service, it   sends a ServiceChange with a "Restart" method.   Allowing the MGC to send duplicate messages to both MGs accommodates   pairs of MGs that are capable of redundant failover of one of the   MGs.  Only the Working MG shall accept or reject transactions.  Upon   failover, the primary MG sends a ServiceChange command with aGroves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 80]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   "Failover" method and a "MG Impending Failure" reason.  The MGC then   uses the secondary MG as the active MG.  When the error condition is   repaired, the Working MG can send a "ServiceChange" with a "Restart"   method.     Note: Redundant failover MGs require a reliable transport, because     the protocol provides no means for a secondary MG running ALF to     acknowledge messages sent from the MGC.11.5  Failure of an MGC   If the MG detects a failure of its controlling MGC, it attempts to   contact the next MGC on its pre-provisioned list.  It starts its   attempts at the beginning (primary MGC), unless that was the MGC that   failed, in which case it starts at its first secondary MGC.  It sends   a ServiceChange message with a "Failover" method and a "MGC Impending   Failure" reason.  If the MG is unable to establish a control   relationship with any MGC, it shall wait a random amount of time as   described insection 9.2 and then start again contacting its primary,   and (if necessary) its secondary MGCs.  When contacting its   previously controlling MGC, the MG sends the ServiceChange message   with "Disconnected" method.   In partial failure, or for manual maintenance reasons, an MGC may   wish to direct its controlled MGs to use a different MGC.  To do so,   it sends a ServiceChange method to the MG with a "HandOff" method,   and its designated replacement in ServiceChangeMgcId.  If "HandOff"   is supported, the MG shall send a ServiceChange message with a   "Handoff" method and a "MGC directed change" reason to the designated   MGC.  If it fails to get a reply from the designated MGC, the MG   shall behave as if its MGC failed, and start contacting secondary   MGCs as specified in the previous paragraph.  If the MG is unable to   establish a control relationship with any MGC, it shall wait a random   amount of time as described in 9.2 and then start contacting its   primary, and if necessary, its secondary MGCs again.   No recommendation is made on how the MGCs involved in the Handoff   maintain state information; this is considered to be out of scope of   this RFC.  The MGC and MG may take the following steps when Handoff   occurs.  When the MGC initiates a HandOff, the handover should be   transparent to Operations on the Media Gateway.  Transactions can be   executed in any order, and could be in progress when the   ServiceChange is executed.  Accordingly, commands in progress   continue and replies to all commands from the original MGC must be   sent to the transport address from which they were sent.  If the   service relationship with the sending MGC has ended, the replies   should be discarded.  The MG may receive outstanding transaction   replies from the new MGC.  No new messages shall be sent to the newGroves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 81]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   MGC until the control association is established.  Repeated   transaction requests shall be directed to the new MGC.  The MG shall   maintain state on all Terminations and Contexts.   It is possible that the MGC could be implemented in such a way that a   failed MGC is replaced by a working MGC where the identity of the new   MGC is the same as the failed one.  In such a case,   ServiceChangeMgcId would be specified with the previous value and the   MG shall behave as if the value was changed, and send a ServiceChange   message, as above.   Pairs of MGCs that are capable of redundant failover can notify the   controlled MGs of the failover by the above mechanism.12 Package definition   The primary mechanism for extension is by means of Packages.   Packages define additional Properties, Events, Signals and Statistics   that may occur on Terminations.   Packages defined by IETF will appear in separate RFCs.   Packages defined by ITU-T may appear in the relevant Recommendations   (e.g., as Recommendations of the H.248 sub-series).   1) A public document or a standard forum document, which can be      referenced as the document that describes the package following      the guideline above, should be specified.   2) The document shall specify the version of the Package that it      describes.   3) The document should be available on a public web server and should      have a stable URL.  The site should provide a mechanism to provide      comments and appropriate responses should be returned.12.1  Guidelines for defining packages   Packages define Properties, Events, Signals, and Statistics.   Packages may also define new error codes according to the guidelines   given in 13.2.  This is a matter of documentary convenience: the   package documentation is submitted to IANA in support of the error   code registration.  If a package is modified, it is unnecessary to   provide IANA with a new document reference in support of the error   code unless the description of the error code itself is modified.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 82]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   Names of all such defined constructs shall consist of the PackageID   (which uniquely identifies the package) and the ID of the item (which   uniquely identifies the item in that package).  In the text encoding   the two shall be separated by a forward slash ("/") character.   Example: togen/playtone is the text encoding to refer to the play   tone signal in the tone generation package.   A Package will contain the following sections:12.1.1   Package   Overall description of the package, specifying:      Package Name: only descriptive      PackageID: is an identifier      Description:      Version:         A new version of a package can only add additional Properties,         Events, Signals, Statistics and new possible values for an         existing parameter described in the original package.  No         deletions or modifications shall be allowed.  A version is an         integer in the range from 1 to 99.      Designed to be extended only (Optional):         This indicates that the package has been expressly designed to         be extended by others, not to be directly referenced.  For         example, the package may not have any function on its own or be         nonsensical on its own.  The MG SHOULD NOT publish this         PackageID when reporting packages.      Extends (Optional): existing package Descriptor         A package may extend an existing package.  The version of the         original package must be specified.  When a package extends         another package it shall only add additional Properties,         Events, Signals, Statistics and new possible values for an         existing parameter described in the original package.  An         extended package shall not redefine or overload an identifier         defined in the original package and packages it may have         extended (multiple levels of extension).  Hence, if package B         version 1 extends package A version 1, version 2 of B will not         be able to extend the A version 2 if A version 2 defines a name         already in B version 1.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 83]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 200312.1.2   Properties   Properties defined by the package, specifying:      Property Name: only descriptive      PropertyID: is an identifier      Description:      Type: One of:         Boolean         String: UTF-8 string         Octet String: A number of octets.  See Annex A and Annex B.3         for encoding         Integer: 4 byte signed integer         Double: 8 byte signed integer         Character: unicode UTF-8 encoding of a single letter.  Could be         more than one octet.         Enumeration: one of a list of possible unique values (see 12.3)         Sub-list: a list of several values from a list.  The type of         sub-list SHALL also be specified.  The type shall be chosen         from the types specified in this section (with the exception of         sub-list).  For example, Type: sub-list of enumeration.  The         encoding of sub-lists is specified in Annexes A and B.3.      Possible values:         A package MUST specify either a specific set of values or a         description of how values are determined.  A package MUST also         specify a default value or the default behaviour when the value         is omitted from its descriptor.  For example, a package may         specify that procedures related to the property are suspended         when its value is omitted.  A default value (but not   procedures)         may be specified as provisionable.      Defined in:         Which H.248.1 descriptor the property is defined in.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 84]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003         LocalControl is for stream dependent properties.         TerminationState is for stream independent properties.  These         are expected to be the most common cases, but it is possible         for properties to be defined in other descriptors.      Characteristics: Read/Write or both, and (optionally), global:         Indicates whether a property is read-only, or read-write, and         if it is global.  If Global is omitted, the property is not         global.  If a property is declared as global, the value of the         property is shared by all Terminations realizing the package.12.1.3   Events   Events defined by the package, specifying:      Event name: only descriptive      EventID: is an identifier      Description:      EventsDescriptor Parameters:         Parameters used by the MGC to configure the event, and found in         the EventsDescriptor.  See 12.2.      ObservedEventsDescriptor Parameters:         Parameters returned to the MGC in Notify requests and in         replies to command requests from the MGC that audit         ObservedEventsDescriptor, and found in the         ObservedEventsDescriptor.  See 12.2.12.1.4   Signals   Signals defined by the package, specifying:      Signal Name: only descriptive      SignalID: is an identifier.  SignalID is used in a      SignalsDescriptor      Description      SignalType: one of:         OO (On/Off)Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 85]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003         TO (TimeOut)         BR (Brief)      NOTE - SignalType may be defined such that it is dependent on the      value of one or more parameters.  The package MUST specify a      default signal type.  If the default type is TO, the package MUST      specify a default duration which may be provisioned.  A default      duration is meaningless for BR.      Duration: in hundredths of seconds      Additional Parameters: see 12.212.1.5   Statistics   Statistics defined by the package, specifying:      Statistic name: only descriptive      StatisticID: is an identifier      StatisticID is used in a StatisticsDescriptor      Description:      Units: unit of measure, e.g., milliseconds, packets12.1.6   Procedures   Additional guidance on the use of the package.12.2  Guidelines to defining Parameters to Events and Signals   Parameter Name: only descriptive   ParameterID: is an identifier.  The textual ParameterID of parameters   to Events and Signals shall not start with "EPA" and "SPA",   respectively.  The textual ParameterID shall also not be "ST",   "Stream", "SY", "SignalType", "DR", "Duration", "NC",   "NotifyCompletion", "KA", "Keepactive", "EB", "Embed", "DM" or   "DigitMap".   Type: One of:      Boolean      String: UTF-8 octet stringGroves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 86]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003      Octet String: A number of octets.  See Annex A and Annex B.3 for      encoding      Integer: 4-octet signed integer      Double: 8-octet signed integer      Character: unicode UTF-8 encoding of a single letter.  Could be      more than one octet.      Enumeration: one of a list of possible unique values (see 12.3)      Sub-list: a list of several values from a list (not supported for      statistics).  The type of sub-list SHALL also be specified.  The      type shall be chosen from the types specified in this section      (with the exception of sub-list).  For example, Type: sub-list of      enumeration.  The encoding of sub-lists is specified in Annexes A      and B.3.   Possible values:      A package MUST specify either a specific set of values or a      description of how values are determined.  A package MUST also      specify a default value or the default behavior when the value is      omitted from its descriptor.  For example, a package may specify      that procedures related to the parameter are suspended when it      value is omitted.  A default value (but not procedures) may be      specified as provisionable.   Description:12.3  Lists   Possible values for parameters include enumerations.  Enumerations   may be defined in a list.  It is recommended that the list be IANA   registered so that packages that extend the list can be defined   without concern for conflicting names.12.4  Identifiers   Identifiers in text encoding shall be strings of up to 64 characters,   containing no spaces, starting with an alphabetic character and   consisting of alphanumeric characters and/or digits, and possibly   including the special character underscore ("_").Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 87]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   Identifiers in binary encoding are 2 octets long.   Both text and binary values shall be specified for each identifier,   including identifiers used as values in enumerated types.12.5  Package registration   A package can be registered with IANA for interoperability reasons.   See clause 13 for IANA Considerations.13 IANA Considerations13.1  Packages   The following considerations SHALL be met to register a package with   IANA:   1) A unique string name, unique serial number and version number is      registered for each package.  The string name is used with text      encoding.  The serial number shall be used with binary encoding.      Serial Numbers 0x8000 to 0xFFFF are reserved for private use.      Serial number 0 is reserved.   2) A contact name, email and postal addresses for that contact shall      be specified.  The contact information shall be updated by the      defining organization as necessary.   3) A reference to a document that describes the package, which should      be public:      The document shall specify the version of the Package that it      describes.      If the document is public, it should be located on a public web      server and should have a stable URL.  The site should provide a      mechanism to provide comments and appropriate responses should be      returned.   4) Packages registered by other than recognized standards bodies      shall have a minimum package name length of 8 characters.   5) All other package names are first come-first served if all other      conditions are met.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 88]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 200313.2  Error codes   The following considerations SHALL be met to register an error code   with IANA:   1) An error number and a one-line (80-character maximum) string is      registered for each error.   2) A complete description of the conditions under which the error is      detected shall be included in a publicly available document.  The      description shall be sufficiently clear to differentiate the error      from all other existing error codes.   3) The document should be available on a public web server and should      have a stable URL.   4) Error numbers registered by recognized standards bodies shall have      3- or 4-character error numbers.   5) Error numbers registered by all other organizations or individuals      shall have 4-character error numbers.   6) An error number shall not be redefined nor modified except by the      organization or individual that originally defined it, or their      successors or assigns.13.3  ServiceChange reasons   The following considerations SHALL be met to register service change   reason with IANA:   1) A one-phrase, 80-character maximum, unique reason code is      registered for each reason.   2) A complete description of the conditions under which the reason is      used is detected shall be included in a publicly available      document.  The description shall be sufficiently clear to      differentiate the reason from all other existing reasons.   3) The document should be available on a public web server and should      have a stable URL.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 89]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003ANNEX A - Binary encoding of the protocol   This annex specifies the syntax of messages using the notation   defined in Recommendation X.680; Information technology - Abstract   Syntax Notation One (ASN.1): Specification of basic notation.   Messages shall be encoded for transmission by applying the basic   encoding rules specified in Recommendation X.690, Information   Technology - ASN.1 Encoding Rules: Specification of Basic Encoding   Rules (BER), Canonical Encoding Rules (CER) and Distinguished   Encoding Rules.A.1   Coding of wildcards   The use of wildcards ALL and CHOOSE is allowed in the protocol.  This   allows a MGC to partially specify Termination IDs and to let the MG   choose from the values that conform to the partial specification.   Termination IDs may encode a hierarchy of names.  This hierarchy is   provisioned.  For instance, a TerminationID may consist of a trunk   group, a trunk within the group and a circuit.  Wildcarding must be   possible at all levels.  The following paragraphs explain how this is   achieved.   The ASN.1 description uses octet strings of up to 8 octets in length   for Termination IDs.  This means that Termination IDs consist of at   most 64 bits.  A fully specified Termination ID may be preceded by a   sequence of wildcarding fields.  A wildcarding field is one octet in   length.  Bit 7 (the most significant bit) of this octet specifies   what type of wildcarding is invoked: if the bit value equals 1, then   the ALL wildcard is used; if the bit value if 0, then the CHOOSE   wildcard is used.  Bit 6 of the wildcarding field specifies whether   the wildcarding pertains to one level in the hierarchical naming   scheme (bit value 0) or to the level of the hierarchy specified in   the wildcarding field plus all lower levels (bit value 1).  Bits 0   through 5 of the wildcarding field specify the bit position in the   Termination ID at which the wildcarding starts.   We illustrate this scheme with some examples.  In these examples, the   most significant bit in a string of bits appears on the left hand   side.   Assume that Termination IDs are three octets long and that each octet   represents a level in a hierarchical naming scheme.  A valid   Termination ID is:      00000001 00011110 01010101.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 90]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   Addressing ALL names with prefix 00000001 00011110 is done as   follows:      wildcarding field: 10000111      Termination ID: 00000001 00011110 xxxxxxxx.   The values of the bits labeled "x" is irrelevant and shall be ignored   by the receiver.   Indicating to the receiver that it must choose a name with 00011110   as the second octet is done as follows:      wildcarding fields: 00010111 followed by 00000111      Termination ID: xxxxxxxx 00011110 xxxxxxxx.   The first wildcard field indicates a CHOOSE wildcard for the level in   the naming hierarchy starting at bit 23, the highest level in our   assumed naming scheme.  The second wildcard field indicates a CHOOSE   wildcard for the level in the naming hierarchy starting at bit 7, the   lowest level in our assumed naming scheme.   Finally, a CHOOSE-wildcarded name with the highest level of the name   equal to 00000001 is specified as follows:      wildcard field: 01001111      Termination ID: 0000001 xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx .   Bit value 1 at bit position 6 of the first octet of the wildcard   field indicates that the wildcarding pertains to the specified level   in the naming hierarchy and all lower levels.   Context IDs may also be wildcarded.  In the case of Context IDs,   however, specifying partial names is not allowed.  Context ID 0x0   SHALL be used to indicate the NULL Context, Context ID 0xFFFFFFFE   SHALL be used to indicate a CHOOSE wildcard, and Context ID   0xFFFFFFFF SHALL be used to indicate an ALL wildcard.   TerminationID 0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF SHALL be used to indicate the ROOT   Termination.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 91]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003A.2   ASN.1 syntax specification   This subclause contains the ASN.1 specification of the H.248.1   protocol syntax.     NOTE 1 - In case a transport mechanism is used that employs     application level framing, the definition of Transaction below     changes.  Refer to the annex or to the Recommendation of the H.248     sub-series defining the transport mechanism for the definition that     applies in that case.     NOTE 2 - The ASN.1 specification below contains a clause defining     TerminationIDList as a sequence of TerminationIDs.  The length of     this sequence SHALL be one, except possibly when used in     contextAuditResult.     NOTE 3 - This syntax specification does not enforce all     restrictions on element inclusions and values.  Some additional     restrictions are stated in comments and other restrictions appear     in the text of this RFC.  These additional restrictions     are part of the protocol even though not enforced by this     specification.     NOTE 4 - The ASN.1 module in this Annex uses octet string types to     encode values for property parameter, signal parameter and event     parameter values and statistics.  The actual types of these values     vary and are specified in Annex C or the relevant package     definition.   A value is first BER-encoded based on its type using the table below.   The result of this BER-encoding is then encoded as an ASN.1 octet   string, "double wrapping" the value.  The format specified in Annex C   or the package relates to BER encoding according to the following   table:   Type Specified in Package   ASN.1 BER Type   String                      IA5String or UTF8String (Note 4)   Integer (4 Octet)           INTEGER   Double (8 octet signed int) INTEGER (Note 3)   Character (UTF-8, Note 1)   IA5String   Enumeration                 ENUMERATED   Boolean                     BOOLEANGroves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 92]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   Unsigned Integer (Note 2)   INTEGER  (Note 3)   Octet (String)              OCTET STRING     Note 1: Can be more than one byte     Note 2: Unsigned integer is referenced in Annex C     Note 3: The BER encoding of INTEGER does not imply the use of 4     bytes.     Note 4: String should be encoded as IA5String when the contents     are all ASCII characters, but as UTF8String if it contains any     Non-ASCII characters.   See ITU-T Rec.  X.690, 8.7, for the definition of the encoding of an   octet string value.   MEDIA-GATEWAY-CONTROL DEFINITIONS AUTOMATIC TAGS::=   BEGIN   MegacoMessage ::= SEQUENCE   {      authHeader     AuthenticationHeader OPTIONAL,      mess           Message   }   AuthenticationHeader ::= SEQUENCE   {      secParmIndex   SecurityParmIndex,      seqNum         SequenceNum,      ad             AuthData   }   SecurityParmIndex ::= OCTET STRING(SIZE(4))   SequenceNum       ::= OCTET STRING(SIZE(4))   AuthData          ::= OCTET STRING (SIZE (12..32))   Message ::= SEQUENCE   {      version           INTEGER(0..99),      -- The version of the protocol defined here is equal to 1.      mId               MId,  -- Name/address of message originator      messageBody       CHOICE      {         messageError      ErrorDescriptor,Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 93]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003         transactions      SEQUENCE OF Transaction      },      ...   }   MId ::= CHOICE   {      ip4Address           IP4Address,      ip6Address           IP6Address,      domainName           DomainName,      deviceName           PathName,      mtpAddress           OCTET STRING(SIZE(2..4)),      -- Addressing structure of mtpAddress:      --     25 - 15           0      --        |  PC        | NI |      --      24 - 14 bits    2 bits      -- Note: 14 bits are defined for international use.      -- Two national options exist where the point code is 16 or 24      -- bits.      -- To octet align the mtpAddress, the MSBs shall be encoded as 0s.             ...   }   DomainName ::= SEQUENCE   {      name        IA5String,      -- The name starts with an alphanumeric digit followed by a      -- sequence of alphanumeric digits, hyphens and dots.  No two      -- dots shall occur consecutively.      portNumber     INTEGER(0..65535) OPTIONAL   }   IP4Address ::= SEQUENCE   {      address        OCTET STRING (SIZE(4)),      portNumber     INTEGER(0..65535) OPTIONAL   }   IP6Address ::= SEQUENCE   {      address        OCTET STRING (SIZE(16)),      portNumber     INTEGER(0..65535) OPTIONAL   }   PathName ::= IA5String(SIZE (1..64))   -- See A.3   Transaction ::= CHOICEGroves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 94]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   {      transactionRequest   TransactionRequest,      transactionPending   TransactionPending,      transactionReply     TransactionReply,      transactionResponseAck  TransactionResponseAck,          -- use of response acks is dependent on underlying transport      ...   }   TransactionId ::= INTEGER(0..4294967295)  -- 32-bit unsigned integer   TransactionRequest ::= SEQUENCE   {      transactionId        TransactionId,      actions              SEQUENCE OF ActionRequest,      ...   }   TransactionPending ::= SEQUENCE   {      transactionId        TransactionId,      ...   }   TransactionReply ::= SEQUENCE   {      transactionId        TransactionId,      immAckRequired       NULL OPTIONAL,      transactionResult    CHOICE      {           transactionError   ErrorDescriptor,           actionReplies      SEQUENCE OF ActionReply      },      ...   }   TransactionResponseAck ::= SEQUENCE OF TransactionAck   TransactionAck ::= SEQUENCE   {      firstAck       TransactionId,      lastAck        TransactionId OPTIONAL   }   ErrorDescriptor ::= SEQUENCE   {      errorCode      ErrorCode,      errorText      ErrorText OPTIONAL   }Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 95]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   ErrorCode ::= INTEGER(0..65535)   -- See clause 13 for IANA Considerations with respect to error codes   ErrorText ::= IA5String   ContextID ::= INTEGER(0..4294967295)   -- Context   NULL Value: 0   -- Context CHOOSE Value: 4294967294 (0xFFFFFFFE)   -- Context    ALL Value: 4294967295 (0xFFFFFFFF)   ActionRequest ::= SEQUENCE   {      contextId         ContextID,      contextRequest       ContextRequest OPTIONAL,      contextAttrAuditReq  ContextAttrAuditRequest OPTIONAL,      commandRequests   SEQUENCE OF CommandRequest   }   ActionReply ::= SEQUENCE   {      contextId         ContextID,      errorDescriptor   ErrorDescriptor OPTIONAL,      contextReply      ContextRequest OPTIONAL,      commandReply      SEQUENCE OF CommandReply   }   ContextRequest ::= SEQUENCE   {      priority       INTEGER(0..15) OPTIONAL,      emergency      BOOLEAN OPTIONAL,      topologyReq    SEQUENCE OF TopologyRequest OPTIONAL,      ...   }   ContextAttrAuditRequest ::= SEQUENCE   {      topology    NULL OPTIONAL,      emergency   NULL OPTIONAL,      priority    NULL OPTIONAL,      ...   }   CommandRequest ::= SEQUENCE   {      command           Command,Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 96]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003      optional          NULL OPTIONAL,      wildcardReturn    NULL OPTIONAL,      ...   }   Command ::= CHOICE   {      addReq               AmmRequest,      moveReq              AmmRequest,      modReq               AmmRequest,      -- Add, Move, Modify requests have the same parameters      subtractReq          SubtractRequest,      auditCapRequest      AuditRequest,      auditValueRequest    AuditRequest,      notifyReq            NotifyRequest,      serviceChangeReq     ServiceChangeRequest,      ...   }   CommandReply ::= CHOICE   {      addReply                AmmsReply,      moveReply               AmmsReply,      modReply                AmmsReply,      subtractReply           AmmsReply,      -- Add, Move, Modify, Subtract replies have the same parameters      auditCapReply           AuditReply,      auditValueReply         AuditReply,      notifyReply             NotifyReply,      serviceChangeReply      ServiceChangeReply,      ...   }   TopologyRequest ::= SEQUENCE   {      terminationFrom         TerminationID,      terminationTo           TerminationID,      topologyDirection       ENUMERATED      {         bothway(0),         isolate(1),         oneway(2)      },      ...   }   AmmRequest ::= SEQUENCE   {Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 97]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003      terminationID        TerminationIDList,      descriptors          SEQUENCE OF AmmDescriptor,      -- At most one descriptor of each type (see AmmDescriptor)      -- allowed in the sequence.      ...   }   AmmDescriptor ::= CHOICE   {      mediaDescriptor         MediaDescriptor,      modemDescriptor         ModemDescriptor,      muxDescriptor           MuxDescriptor,      eventsDescriptor        EventsDescriptor,      eventBufferDescriptor   EventBufferDescriptor,      signalsDescriptor       SignalsDescriptor,      digitMapDescriptor      DigitMapDescriptor,      auditDescriptor         AuditDescriptor,      ...   }   AmmsReply ::= SEQUENCE   {      terminationID        TerminationIDList,      terminationAudit     TerminationAudit OPTIONAL,      ...   }   SubtractRequest ::= SEQUENCE   {      terminationID        TerminationIDList,      auditDescriptor      AuditDescriptor OPTIONAL,      ...   }   AuditRequest ::= SEQUENCE   {      terminationID        TerminationID,      auditDescriptor      AuditDescriptor,      ...   }   AuditReply ::= CHOICE   {      contextAuditResult   TerminationIDList,      error                ErrorDescriptor,      auditResult          AuditResult,      ...   }Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 98]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   AuditResult ::= SEQUENCE   {      terminationID           TerminationID,      terminationAuditResult  TerminationAudit   }   TerminationAudit ::= SEQUENCE OF AuditReturnParameter   AuditReturnParameter ::= CHOICE   {      errorDescriptor         ErrorDescriptor,      mediaDescriptor         MediaDescriptor,      modemDescriptor         ModemDescriptor,      muxDescriptor           MuxDescriptor,      eventsDescriptor        EventsDescriptor,      eventBufferDescriptor   EventBufferDescriptor,      signalsDescriptor       SignalsDescriptor,      digitMapDescriptor      DigitMapDescriptor,      observedEventsDescriptor   ObservedEventsDescriptor,      statisticsDescriptor    StatisticsDescriptor,      packagesDescriptor      PackagesDescriptor,      emptyDescriptors        AuditDescriptor,      ...   }   AuditDescriptor ::= SEQUENCE   {      auditToken  BIT STRING         {            muxToken(0), modemToken(1), mediaToken(2),            eventsToken(3), signalsToken(4),            digitMapToken(5), statsToken(6),            observedEventsToken(7),            packagesToken(8), eventBufferToken(9)         } OPTIONAL,      ...   }   NotifyRequest ::= SEQUENCE   {      terminationID              TerminationIDList,      observedEventsDescriptor   ObservedEventsDescriptor,      errorDescriptor            ErrorDescriptor OPTIONAL,      ...   }Groves, et al.              Standards Track                    [Page 99]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   NotifyReply ::= SEQUENCE   {      terminationID           TerminationIDList,      errorDescriptor         ErrorDescriptor OPTIONAL,      ...   }   ObservedEventsDescriptor ::= SEQUENCE   {      requestId               RequestID,      observedEventLst        SEQUENCE OF ObservedEvent   }   ObservedEvent ::= SEQUENCE   {      eventName            EventName,      streamID             StreamID OPTIONAL,      eventParList         SEQUENCE OF EventParameter,      timeNotation         TimeNotation OPTIONAL,      ...   }   EventName ::= PkgdName   EventParameter ::= SEQUENCE   {      eventParameterName      Name,      value                   Value,   -- For use of extraInfo see the comment related to PropertyParm      extraInfo CHOICE      {         relation Relation,         range    BOOLEAN,         sublist  BOOLEAN      } OPTIONAL,      ...   }   ServiceChangeRequest ::= SEQUENCE   {      terminationID           TerminationIDList,      serviceChangeParms      ServiceChangeParm,      ...   }   ServiceChangeReply ::= SEQUENCE   {      terminationID           TerminationIDList,Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 100]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003      serviceChangeResult     ServiceChangeResult,      ...   }   -- For ServiceChangeResult, no parameters are mandatory.  Hence the   -- distinction between ServiceChangeParm and ServiceChangeResParm.   ServiceChangeResult ::= CHOICE   {      errorDescriptor            ErrorDescriptor,      serviceChangeResParms      ServiceChangeResParm   }   WildcardField ::= OCTET STRING(SIZE(1))   TerminationID ::= SEQUENCE   {      wildcard SEQUENCE OF WildcardField,      id    OCTET STRING(SIZE(1..8)),      ...   }   -- See A.1 for explanation of wildcarding mechanism.   -- Termination ID 0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF indicates the ROOT Termination.   TerminationIDList ::= SEQUENCE OF TerminationID   MediaDescriptor ::= SEQUENCE   {      termStateDescr TerminationStateDescriptor OPTIONAL,      streams     CHOICE      {         oneStream      StreamParms,         multiStream    SEQUENCE OF StreamDescriptor      } OPTIONAL,      ...   }   StreamDescriptor ::= SEQUENCE   {      streamID          StreamID,      streamParms       StreamParms   }   StreamParms ::= SEQUENCE   {      localControlDescriptor     LocalControlDescriptor OPTIONAL,      localDescriptor            LocalRemoteDescriptor OPTIONAL,Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 101]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003      remoteDescriptor           LocalRemoteDescriptor OPTIONAL,      ...   }   LocalControlDescriptor ::= SEQUENCE   {      streamMode        StreamMode OPTIONAL,      reserveValue      BOOLEAN OPTIONAL,      reserveGroup      BOOLEAN OPTIONAL,      propertyParms     SEQUENCE OF PropertyParm,      ...   }   StreamMode ::= ENUMERATED   {      sendOnly(0),      recvOnly(1),      sendRecv(2),      inactive(3),      loopBack(4),         ...   }   -- In PropertyParm, value is a SEQUENCE OF octet string.  When sent   -- by an MGC the interpretation is as follows:   -- empty sequence means CHOOSE   -- one element sequence specifies value   -- If the sublist field is not selected, a longer sequence means   -- "choose one of the values" (i.e., value1 OR value2 OR ...)   -- If the sublist field is selected,   -- a sequence with more than one element encodes the value of a   -- list-valued property (i.e., value1 AND value2 AND ...).   -- The relation field may only be selected if the value sequence   -- has length 1.  It indicates that the MG has to choose a value   -- for the property.  E.g., x > 3 (using the greaterThan   -- value for relation) instructs the MG to choose any value larger   -- than 3 for property x.   -- The range field may only be selected if the value sequence   -- has length 2.  It indicates that the MG has to choose a value   -- in the range between the first octet in the value sequence and   -- the trailing octet in the value sequence, including the   -- boundary values.   -- When sent by the MG, only responses to an AuditCapability request   -- may contain multiple values, a range, or a relation field.   PropertyParm ::= SEQUENCE   {Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 102]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003      name        PkgdName,      value       SEQUENCE OF OCTET STRING,      extraInfo   CHOICE      {         relation    Relation,         range       BOOLEAN,         sublist     BOOLEAN      } OPTIONAL,      ...   }   Name ::= OCTET STRING(SIZE(2))   PkgdName ::= OCTET STRING(SIZE(4))   -- represents Package Name (2 octets) plus Property, Event,   -- Signal Names or Statistics ID. (2 octets)   -- To wildcard a package use 0xFFFF for first two octets, choose   -- is not allowed.  To reference native property tag specified in   -- Annex C, use 0x0000 as first two octets.   -- To wildcard a Property, Event, Signal, or Statistics ID, use   -- 0xFFFF for last two octets, choose is not allowed.   -- Wildcarding of Package Name is permitted only if Property,   -- Event, Signal, or Statistics ID are   -- also wildcarded.   Relation ::= ENUMERATED   {      greaterThan(0),      smallerThan(1),      unequalTo(2),      ...   }   LocalRemoteDescriptor ::= SEQUENCE   {      propGrps SEQUENCE OF PropertyGroup,      ...   }   PropertyGroup ::= SEQUENCE OF PropertyParm   TerminationStateDescriptor ::= SEQUENCE   {      propertyParms        SEQUENCE OF PropertyParm,      eventBufferControl   EventBufferControl OPTIONAL,      serviceState         ServiceState OPTIONAL,      ...   }Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 103]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   EventBufferControl ::= ENUMERATED   {      off(0),      lockStep(1),      ...   }   ServiceState ::= ENUMERATED   {      test(0),      outOfSvc(1),      inSvc(2),         ...   }   MuxDescriptor   ::= SEQUENCE   {      muxType           MuxType,      termList          SEQUENCE OF TerminationID,      nonStandardData   NonStandardData OPTIONAL,      ...   }   MuxType ::= ENUMERATED   {      h221(0),      h223(1),      h226(2),      v76(3),      ...   }   StreamID ::= INTEGER(0..65535)   -- 16-bit unsigned integer   EventsDescriptor ::= SEQUENCE   {      requestID      RequestID OPTIONAL,                  -- RequestID must be present if eventList                  -- is non empty      eventList      SEQUENCE OF RequestedEvent,      ...   }   RequestedEvent ::= SEQUENCE   {      pkgdName       PkgdName,Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 104]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003      streamID       StreamID OPTIONAL,      eventAction    RequestedActions OPTIONAL,      evParList      SEQUENCE OF EventParameter,      ...   }   RequestedActions ::= SEQUENCE   {      keepActive        BOOLEAN OPTIONAL,      eventDM           EventDM OPTIONAL,      secondEvent          SecondEventsDescriptor OPTIONAL,      signalsDescriptor    SignalsDescriptor OPTIONAL,      ...   }   EventDM ::= CHOICE   {  digitMapName   DigitMapName,      digitMapValue  DigitMapValue   }   SecondEventsDescriptor ::= SEQUENCE   {      requestID         RequestID OPTIONAL,      eventList         SEQUENCE OF SecondRequestedEvent,      ...   }   SecondRequestedEvent ::= SEQUENCE   {      pkgdName          PkgdName,      streamID          StreamID OPTIONAL,      eventAction       SecondRequestedActions OPTIONAL,      evParList         SEQUENCE OF EventParameter,      ...   }   SecondRequestedActions ::= SEQUENCE   {      keepActive           BOOLEAN OPTIONAL,      eventDM              EventDM OPTIONAL,      signalsDescriptor    SignalsDescriptor OPTIONAL,      ...   }   EventBufferDescriptor ::= SEQUENCE OF EventSpec   EventSpec ::= SEQUENCE   {Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 105]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003      eventName      EventName,      streamID       StreamID OPTIONAL,      eventParList   SEQUENCE OF EventParameter,      ...   }   SignalsDescriptor ::= SEQUENCE OF SignalRequest   SignalRequest ::=CHOICE   {      signal         Signal,      seqSigList     SeqSigList,      ...   }   SeqSigList ::= SEQUENCE   {      id                INTEGER(0..65535),      signalList        SEQUENCE OF Signal   }   Signal ::= SEQUENCE   {      signalName        SignalName,      streamID          StreamID OPTIONAL,      sigType           SignalType OPTIONAL,      duration          INTEGER (0..65535) OPTIONAL,      notifyCompletion  NotifyCompletion OPTIONAL,      keepActive        BOOLEAN OPTIONAL,      sigParList        SEQUENCE OF SigParameter,      ...   }   SignalType ::= ENUMERATED   {      brief(0),      onOff(1),      timeOut(2),      ...   }   SignalName ::= PkgdName   NotifyCompletion ::= BIT STRING   {      onTimeOut(0), onInterruptByEvent(1),      onInterruptByNewSignalDescr(2), otherReason(3)   }Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 106]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   SigParameter ::= SEQUENCE   {      sigParameterName     Name,      value                Value,      -- For use of extraInfo see the comment related to PropertyParm      extraInfo CHOICE      {         relation Relation,         range    BOOLEAN,         sublist  BOOLEAN      } OPTIONAL,      ...   }   -- For an AuditCapReply with all events, the RequestID SHALL be ALL.   -- ALL is represented by 0xffffffff.   RequestID ::= INTEGER(0..4294967295)   -- 32-bit unsigned integer   ModemDescriptor ::= SEQUENCE   {      mtl               SEQUENCE OF ModemType,      mpl               SEQUENCE OF PropertyParm,      nonStandardData   NonStandardData OPTIONAL   }   ModemType ::= ENUMERATED   {      v18(0),      v22(1),      v22bis(2),      v32(3),      v32bis(4),      v34(5),      v90(6),      v91(7),      synchISDN(8),      ...   }   DigitMapDescriptor ::= SEQUENCE   {      digitMapName   DigitMapName   OPTIONAL,      digitMapValue  DigitMapValue  OPTIONAL   }Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 107]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   DigitMapName ::= Name   DigitMapValue ::= SEQUENCE   {      startTimer     INTEGER(0..99) OPTIONAL,      shortTimer     INTEGER(0..99) OPTIONAL,      longTimer      INTEGER(0..99) OPTIONAL,      digitMapBody      IA5String,   -- Units are seconds for start, short and long timers, and   -- hundreds of milliseconds for duration timer.  Thus start,   -- short, and long range from 1 to 99 seconds and duration   -- from 100 ms to 9.9 s      -- See A.3 for explanation of digit map syntax      ...   }   ServiceChangeParm ::= SEQUENCE   {      serviceChangeMethod     ServiceChangeMethod,      serviceChangeAddress    ServiceChangeAddress OPTIONAL,      serviceChangeVersion    INTEGER(0..99) OPTIONAL,      serviceChangeProfile    ServiceChangeProfile OPTIONAL,      serviceChangeReason     Value,   -- A serviceChangeReason consists of a numeric reason code   -- and an optional text description.   -- The serviceChangeReason SHALL be a string consisting of   -- a decimal reason code, optionally followed by a single   -- space character and a textual description string.   -- This string is first BER-encoded as an IA5String.   -- The result of this BER-encoding is then encoded as   -- an ASN.1 OCTET STRING type, "double wrapping" the   -- value as was done for package elements.      serviceChangeDelay      INTEGER(0..4294967295) OPTIONAL,                                        -- 32-bit unsigned integer      serviceChangeMgcId      MId OPTIONAL,      timeStamp               TimeNotation OPTIONAL,      nonStandardData         NonStandardData OPTIONAL,      ...   }   ServiceChangeAddress ::= CHOICE   {      portNumber        INTEGER(0..65535),    -- TCP/UDP port number      ip4Address        IP4Address,      ip6Address        IP6Address,      domainName        DomainName,      deviceName        PathName,      mtpAddress        OCTET STRING(SIZE(2..4)),Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 108]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003      ...   }   ServiceChangeResParm ::= SEQUENCE   {      serviceChangeMgcId      MId OPTIONAL,      serviceChangeAddress    ServiceChangeAddress OPTIONAL,      serviceChangeVersion    INTEGER(0..99) OPTIONAL,      serviceChangeProfile    ServiceChangeProfile OPTIONAL,      timestamp               TimeNotation OPTIONAL,      ...   }   ServiceChangeMethod ::= ENUMERATED   {      failover(0),      forced(1),      graceful(2),      restart(3),      disconnected(4),      handOff(5),      ...   }   ServiceChangeProfile ::= SEQUENCE   {      profileName    IA5String(SIZE (1..67))      -- 64 characters for name, 1 for "/", 2 for version to match ABNF   }   PackagesDescriptor ::= SEQUENCE OF PackagesItem   PackagesItem ::= SEQUENCE   {      packageName       Name,      packageVersion    INTEGER(0..99),      ...   }   StatisticsDescriptor ::= SEQUENCE OF StatisticsParameter   StatisticsParameter ::= SEQUENCE   {      statName       PkgdName,      statValue      Value OPTIONAL   }Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 109]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   NonStandardData ::= SEQUENCE   {      nonStandardIdentifier   NonStandardIdentifier,      data                    OCTET STRING   }   NonStandardIdentifier ::= CHOICE   {      object            OBJECT IDENTIFIER,      h221NonStandard   H221NonStandard,      experimental      IA5String(SIZE(8)),          -- first two characters should be "X-" or "X+"      ...   }   H221NonStandard ::= SEQUENCE   {  t35CountryCode1   INTEGER(0..255),      t35CountryCode2   INTEGER(0..255),      -- country, as per T.35      t35Extension      INTEGER(0..255),      -- assigned nationally      manufacturerCode     INTEGER(0..65535), -- assigned nationally      ...   }   TimeNotation ::= SEQUENCE   {      date     IA5String(SIZE(8)),  -- yyyymmdd format      time     IA5String(SIZE(8))   -- hhmmssss format      -- per ISO 8601:1988   }   Value ::= SEQUENCE OF OCTET STRING   ENDGroves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 110]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003A.3   Digit maps and path names   From a syntactic viewpoint, digit maps are strings with syntactic   restrictions imposed upon them.  The syntax of valid digit maps is   specified in ABNF [RFC 2234].  The syntax for digit maps presented in   this subclause is for illustrative purposes only.  The definition of   digitMap in Annex B takes precedence in the case of differences   between the two.     digitMap = (digitString / LWSP "(" LWSP digitStringList LWSP ")"               LWSP)     digitStringList = digitString *( LWSP "|" LWSP digitString )     digitString = 1*(digitStringElement)     digitStringElement = digitPosition [DOT]     digitPosition = digitMapLetter / digitMapRange     digitMapRange = ("x" / (LWSP "[" LWSP digitLetter LWSP "]" LWSP))     digitLetter = *((DIGIT "-" DIGIT) /digitMapLetter)     digitMapLetter = DIGIT           ;digits 0-9             / %x41-4B / %x61-6B    ;a-k and A-K             / "L"/ "S"       ;Inter-event timers                                 ;(long, short)             / "Z"            ;Long duration event     DOT = %x2E ; "."     LWSP = *(WSP / COMMENT / EOL)     WSP = SP / HTAB     COMMENT = ";" *(SafeChar / RestChar / WSP) EOL     EOL = (CR [LF]) / LF     SP = %x20     HTAB = %x09     CR = %x0D     LF = %x0A     SafeChar = DIGIT / ALPHA / "+" / "-" / "&" / "!" / "_" / "/" /         "'" / "?" / "@" / "^" / "`" / "~" / "*" / "$" / "\" /         "(" / ")" / "%" / "."     RestChar = ";" / "[" / "]" / "{" / "}" / ":" / "," / "#" /         "<" / ">" / "=" / %x22     DIGIT = %x30-39       ; digits 0 through 9     ALPHA = %x41-5A / %x61-7A; A-Z, a-z   A path name is also a string with syntactic restrictions imposed upon   it.  The ABNF production defining it is copied from Annex B.     ; Total length of pathNAME must not exceed 64 chars.     pathNAME = ["*"] NAME *("/" / "*"/ ALPHA / DIGIT /"_" / "$" )                            ["@" pathDomainName ]Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 111]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003     ; ABNF allows two or more consecutive "." although it is     ; meaningless in a path domain name.     pathDomainName       = (ALPHA / DIGIT / "*" )                            *63(ALPHA / DIGIT / "-"     NAME = ALPHA *63(ALPHA / DIGIT / "_" )Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 112]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003ANNEX B - Text encoding of the protocolB.1   Coding of wildcards   In a text encoding of the protocol, while TerminationIDs are   arbitrary, by judicious choice of names, the wildcard character, "*"   may be made more useful.  When the wildcard character is encountered,   it will "match" all TerminationIDs having the same previous and   following characters (if appropriate).  For example, if there were   TerminationIDs of R13/3/1, R13/3/2 and R13/3/3, the TerminationID   R13/3/* would match all of them.  There are some circumstances where   ALL Terminations must be referred to.  The TerminationID "*"   suffices, and is referred to as ALL.  The CHOOSE TerminationID "$"   may be used to signal to the MG that it has to create an ephemeral   Termination or select an idle physical Termination.B.2   ABNF specification   The protocol syntax is presented in ABNF according toRFC 2234.      Note 1 - This syntax specification does not enforce all      restrictions on element inclusions and values.  Some additional      restrictions are stated in comments and other restrictions appear      in the text of this RFC.  These additional restrictions are part      of the protocol even though not enforced by this specification.      Note 2 - The syntax is context-dependent.  For example, "Add" can      be the AddToken or a NAME depending on the context in which it      occurs.   Everything in the ABNF and text encoding is case insensitive.  This   includes TerminationIDs, digitmap Ids etc.  SDP is case sensitive as   perRFC 2327.   ; NOTE -- The ABNF in this section uses the VALUE construct (or lists   ; of VALUE constructs) to encode various package element values   ; (properties, signal parameters, etc.).  The types of these values   ; vary and are specified the relevant package definition.  Several   ; such types are described insection 12.2.   ;   ; The ABNF specification for VALUE allows a quotedString form or a   ; collection of SafeChars.  The encoding of package element values   ; into ABNF VALUES is specified below.  If a type's encoding allows   ; characters other than SafeChars, the quotedString form MUST be used   ; for all values of that type, even for specific values that consist   ; only of SafeChars.   ;Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 113]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   ; String:  A string MUST use the quotedString form of VALUE and can   ; contain anything allowable in the quotedString form.   ;   ; Integer, Double, and Unsigned Integer:  Decimal values can be   ; encoded using characters 0-9.  Hexadecimal values must be prefixed   ; with '0x' and can use characters 0-9,a-f,A-F.  An octal format is   ; not supported.  Negative integers start with '-' and MUST be   ; Decimal.  The SafeChar form of VALUE MUST be used.   ;   ; Character:  A UTF-8 encoding of a single letter surrounded by   ; double quotes.   ;   ; Enumeration:  An enumeration MUST use the SafeChar form of VALUE   ; and can contain anything allowable in the SafeChar form.   ;   ; Boolean:  Boolean values are encoded as "on" and "off" and are   ; case insensitive.  The SafeChar form of VALUE MUST be used.   ;   ; Future types:  Any defined types MUST fit within   ; the ABNF specification of VALUE.  Specifically, if a type's   ; encoding allows characters other than SafeChars, the quotedString   ; form MUST be used for all values of that type, even for specific   ; values that consist only of SafeChars.   ;   ; Note that there is no way to use the double quote character within   ; a value.   ;   ; Note that SDP disallows whitespace at the beginning of a line,   ; Megaco ABNF allows whitespace before the beginning of the SDP in   ; the Local/Remote descriptor.  Parsers should accept whitespace   ; between the LBRKT following the Local/Remote token and the   ; beginning of the SDP.   megacoMessage        = LWSP [authenticationHeader SEP ] message   authenticationHeader = AuthToken EQUAL SecurityParmIndex COLON                          SequenceNum COLON AuthData   SecurityParmIndex    = "0x" 8(HEXDIG)   SequenceNum          = "0x" 8(HEXDIG)   AuthData             = "0x" 24*64(HEXDIG)   message            = MegacopToken SLASH Version SEP mId SEP   messageBody   ; The version of the protocol defined here is equal to 1.   messageBody          = ( errorDescriptor / transactionList )Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 114]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   transactionList      = 1*( transactionRequest / transactionReply /                          transactionPending / transactionResponseAck )   ;Use of response acks is dependent on underlying transport   transactionPending   = PendingToken EQUAL TransactionID LBRKT   RBRKT   transactionResponseAck = ResponseAckToken LBRKT transactionAck                  *(COMMA transactionAck) RBRKT   transactionAck = transactionID / (transactionID "-" transactionID)   transactionRequest   = TransToken EQUAL TransactionID LBRKT                          actionRequest *(COMMA actionRequest) RBRKT   actionRequest        = CtxToken EQUAL ContextID LBRKT ((                          contextRequest [COMMA  commandRequestList])                          / commandRequestList) RBRKT   contextRequest    = ((contextProperties [COMMA contextAudit])               / contextAudit)   contextProperties    = contextProperty *(COMMA contextProperty)   ; at-most-once   contextProperty    = (topologyDescriptor / priority / EmergencyToken)   contextAudit   = ContextAuditToken LBRKT contextAuditProperties                         *(COMMA contextAuditProperties) RBRKT   ; at-most-once   contextAuditProperties = ( TopologyToken / EmergencyToken /                              PriorityToken )   ; "O-" indicates an optional command   ; "W-" indicates a wildcarded response to a command   commandRequestList = ["O-"] ["W-"] commandRequest                        *(COMMA ["O-"] ["W-"]commandRequest)   commandRequest      = ( ammRequest / subtractRequest / auditRequest /                           notifyRequest / serviceChangeRequest)   transactionReply     = ReplyToken EQUAL TransactionID LBRKT                     [ ImmAckRequiredToken COMMA]                   ( errorDescriptor / actionReplyList ) RBRKT   actionReplyList      = actionReply *(COMMA actionReply )Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 115]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   actionReply          = CtxToken EQUAL ContextID LBRKT                     ( errorDescriptor / commandReply ) /            (commandReply COMMA errorDescriptor) ) RBRKT   commandReply      = (( contextProperties [COMMA commandReplyList] ) /                           commandReplyList )   commandReplyList     = commandReplys *(COMMA commandReplys )   commandReplys        = (serviceChangeReply / auditReply / ammsReply /                           notifyReply )   ;Add Move and Modify have the same request parameters   ammRequest           = (AddToken / MoveToken / ModifyToken ) EQUAL                          TerminationID [LBRKT ammParameter *(COMMA                          ammParameter) RBRKT]   ;at-most-once   ammParameter         = (mediaDescriptor / modemDescriptor /                           muxDescriptor / eventsDescriptor /                           signalsDescriptor / digitMapDescriptor /                           eventBufferDescriptor / auditDescriptor)   ammsReply            = (AddToken / MoveToken / ModifyToken /                           SubtractToken ) EQUAL TerminationID [ LBRKT                           terminationAudit RBRKT ]   subtractRequest      =  SubtractToken EQUAL TerminationID                           [ LBRKT auditDescriptor RBRKT]   auditRequest         =  (AuditValueToken / AuditCapToken ) EQUAL                           TerminationID LBRKT auditDescriptor RBRKT   auditReply           = (AuditValueToken / AuditCapToken )                          ( contextTerminationAudit  / auditOther)   auditOther           = EQUAL TerminationID [LBRKT                          terminationAudit RBRKT]   terminationAudit = auditReturnParameter *(COMMA auditReturnParameter)   contextTerminationAudit = EQUAL CtxToken ( terminationIDList /                          LBRKT errorDescriptor RBRKT )   auditReturnParameter = (mediaDescriptor / modemDescriptor /                           muxDescriptor / eventsDescriptor /                           signalsDescriptor / digitMapDescriptor /Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 116]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003                      observedEventsDescriptor / eventBufferDescriptor /                           statisticsDescriptor / packagesDescriptor /                            errorDescriptor / auditItem)   auditDescriptor      = AuditToken LBRKT [ auditItem                          *(COMMA auditItem) ] RBRKT   notifyRequest        = NotifyToken EQUAL TerminationID                          LBRKT ( observedEventsDescriptor                                [ COMMA errorDescriptor ] ) RBRKT   notifyReply          = NotifyToken EQUAL TerminationID                          [ LBRKT errorDescriptor RBRKT ]   serviceChangeRequest = ServiceChangeToken EQUAL TerminationID                          LBRKT serviceChangeDescriptor RBRKT   serviceChangeReply   = ServiceChangeToken EQUAL TerminationID                          [LBRKT (errorDescriptor /                          serviceChangeReplyDescriptor) RBRKT]   errorDescriptor   = ErrorToken EQUAL ErrorCode                       LBRKT [quotedString] RBRKT   ErrorCode            = 1*4(DIGIT) ; could be extended   TransactionID        = UINT32   mId                  = (( domainAddress / domainName )                          [":" portNumber]) / mtpAddress / deviceName   ; ABNF allows two or more consecutive "." although it is meaningless   ; in a domain name.   domainName           = "<" (ALPHA / DIGIT) *63(ALPHA / DIGIT / "-" /                          ".") ">"   deviceName           = pathNAME   ;The values 0x0, 0xFFFFFFFE and 0xFFFFFFFF are reserved.   ContextID            = (UINT32 / "*" / "-" / "$")   domainAddress        = "[" (IPv4address / IPv6address) "]"   ;RFC2373 contains the definition of IP6Addresses.   IPv6address          = hexpart [ ":" IPv4address ]   IPv4address          = V4hex DOT V4hex DOT V4hex DOT V4hex   V4hex                = 1*3(DIGIT) ; "0".."255"   ; this production, while occurring inRFC2373, is not referenced   ; IPv6prefix           = hexpart SLASH 1*2DIGIT   hexpart           = hexseq "::" [ hexseq ] / "::" [ hexseq ] / hexseqGroves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 117]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   hexseq               = hex4 *( ":" hex4)   hex4                 = 1*4HEXDIG   portNumber           = UINT16   ; Addressing structure of mtpAddress:   ; 25 - 15            0   ;    |  PC        | NI |   ;    24 - 14 bits    2 bits   ; Note: 14 bits are defined for international use.   ; Two national options exist where the point code is 16 or 24 bits.   ; To octet align the mtpAddress the MSBs shall be encoded as 0s.   ; An octet shall be represented by 2 hex digits.   mtpAddress           = MTPToken LBRKT 4*8 (HEXDIG) RBRKT   terminationIDList  = LBRKT TerminationID *(COMMA TerminationID) RBRKT   ; Total length of pathNAME must not exceed 64 chars.   pathNAME      = ["*"] NAME *("/" / "*"/ ALPHA / DIGIT /"_" / "$" )                          ["@" pathDomainName ]   ; ABNF allows two or more consecutive "." although it is meaningless   ; in a path domain name.   pathDomainName       = (ALPHA / DIGIT / "*" )                          *63(ALPHA / DIGIT / "-" / "*" / ".")   TerminationID        = "ROOT" / pathNAME / "$" / "*"   mediaDescriptor = MediaToken LBRKT mediaParm *(COMMA mediaParm) RBRKT   ; at-most one terminationStateDescriptor   ; and either streamParm(s) or streamDescriptor(s) but not both   mediaParm            = (streamParm / streamDescriptor /                           terminationStateDescriptor)   ; at-most-once per item   streamParm           = ( localDescriptor / remoteDescriptor /                           localControlDescriptor )   streamDescriptor     = StreamToken EQUAL StreamID LBRKT streamParm                          *(COMMA streamParm) RBRKT   localControlDescriptor = LocalControlToken LBRKT localParm                            *(COMMA localParm) RBRKT   ; at-most-once per item except for propertyParm   localParm = ( streamMode / propertyParm / reservedValueMode                  / reservedGroupMode )Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 118]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   reservedValueMode    = ReservedValueToken EQUAL ( "ON" / "OFF" )   reservedGroupMode    = ReservedGroupToken EQUAL ( "ON" / "OFF" )   streamMode           = ModeToken EQUAL streamModes   streamModes     = (SendonlyToken / RecvonlyToken / SendrecvToken /                          InactiveToken / LoopbackToken )   propertyParm         = pkgdName parmValue   parmValue            = (EQUAL alternativeValue/ INEQUAL VALUE)   alternativeValue     = ( VALUE                  / LSBRKT VALUE *(COMMA VALUE) RSBRKT                   ; sublist (i.e., A AND B AND ...)                  / LBRKT VALUE *(COMMA VALUE) RBRKT                   ; alternatives (i.e., A OR B OR ...)                  /  LSBRKT VALUE COLON VALUE RSBRKT )                   ; range   INEQUAL              = LWSP (">" / "<" / "#" ) LWSP   LSBRKT               = LWSP "[" LWSP   RSBRKT               = LWSP "]" LWSP   ; Note - The octet zero is not among the permitted characters in   ; octet string.  As the current definition is limited to SDP, and a   ; zero octet would not be a legal character in SDP, this is not a   ; concern.   localDescriptor      = LocalToken LBRKT octetString RBRKT   remoteDescriptor     = RemoteToken LBRKT octetString RBRKT   eventBufferDescriptor= EventBufferToken [ LBRKT eventSpec                          *( COMMA eventSpec) RBRKT ]   eventSpec      = pkgdName [ LBRKT eventSpecParameter                *(COMMA eventSpecParameter) RBRKT ]   eventSpecParameter   = (eventStream / eventOther)   eventBufferControl     = BufferToken EQUAL ( "OFF" / LockStepToken )   terminationStateDescriptor = TerminationStateToken LBRKT              terminationStateParm *( COMMA terminationStateParm ) RBRKT   ; at-most-once per item except for propertyParm   terminationStateParm = (propertyParm / serviceStates /                           eventBufferControl )Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 119]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   serviceStates        = ServiceStatesToken EQUAL ( TestToken /                          OutOfSvcToken / InSvcToken )   muxDescriptor        = MuxToken EQUAL MuxType  terminationIDList   MuxType              = ( H221Token / H223Token / H226Token / V76Token                           / extensionParameter )   StreamID             = UINT16   pkgdName     = (PackageName SLASH ItemID) ;specific item                / (PackageName SLASH "*") ;all items in package                / ("*" SLASH "*") ; all items supported by the MG   PackageName          = NAME   ItemID               = NAME   eventsDescriptor     = EventsToken [ EQUAL RequestID LBRKT                        requestedEvent *( COMMA requestedEvent ) RBRKT ]   requestedEvent       = pkgdName [ LBRKT eventParameter                          *( COMMA eventParameter ) RBRKT ]   ; at-most-once each of KeepActiveToken , eventDM and eventStream   ;at most one of either embedWithSig or embedNoSig but not both   ;KeepActiveToken and embedWithSig must not both be present   eventParameter       = ( embedWithSig / embedNoSig / KeepActiveToken                            /eventDM / eventStream / eventOther )   embedWithSig         = EmbedToken LBRKT signalsDescriptor                            [COMMA embedFirst ] RBRKT   embedNoSig        = EmbedToken LBRKT embedFirst RBRKT   ; at-most-once of each   embedFirst      = EventsToken [ EQUAL RequestID LBRKT              secondRequestedEvent *(COMMA secondRequestedEvent) RBRKT ]   secondRequestedEvent = pkgdName [ LBRKT secondEventParameter                          *( COMMA secondEventParameter ) RBRKT ]   ; at-most-once each of embedSig , KeepActiveToken, eventDM or   ; eventStream   ; KeepActiveToken and embedSig must not both be present   secondEventParameter = ( embedSig / KeepActiveToken / eventDM /                            eventStream / eventOther )   embedSig  = EmbedToken LBRKT signalsDescriptor RBRKT   eventStream          = StreamToken EQUAL StreamIDGroves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 120]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   eventOther           = eventParameterName parmValue   eventParameterName   = NAME   eventDM              = DigitMapToken EQUAL(( digitMapName ) /                          (LBRKT digitMapValue RBRKT ))   signalsDescriptor    = SignalsToken LBRKT [ signalParm                          *(COMMA signalParm)] RBRKT   signalParm           = signalList / signalRequest   signalRequest        = signalName [ LBRKT sigParameter                          *(COMMA sigParameter) RBRKT ]   signalList           = SignalListToken EQUAL signalListId LBRKT                          signalListParm *(COMMA signalListParm) RBRKT   signalListId         = UINT16   ;exactly once signalType, at most once duration and every signal   ;parameter   signalListParm       = signalRequest   signalName           = pkgdName   ;at-most-once sigStream, at-most-once sigSignalType,   ;at-most-once sigDuration, every signalParameterName at most once   sigParameter = sigStream / sigSignalType / sigDuration / sigOther               / notifyCompletion / KeepActiveToken   sigStream            = StreamToken EQUAL StreamID   sigOther             = sigParameterName parmValue   sigParameterName     = NAME   sigSignalType        = SignalTypeToken EQUAL signalType   signalType           = (OnOffToken / TimeOutToken / BriefToken)   sigDuration          = DurationToken EQUAL UINT16   notifyCompletion     = NotifyCompletionToken EQUAL (LBRKT            notificationReason *(COMMA notificationReason) RBRKT)   notificationReason   = ( TimeOutToken / InterruptByEventToken                        / InterruptByNewSignalsDescrToken                        / OtherReasonToken )   observedEventsDescriptor = ObservedEventsToken EQUAL RequestID                      LBRKT observedEvent *(COMMA observedEvent) RBRKT   ;time per event, because it might be buffered   observedEvent        = [ TimeStamp LWSP COLON] LWSP                          pkgdName [ LBRKT observedEventParameter                          *(COMMA observedEventParameter) RBRKT ]Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 121]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   ;at-most-once eventStream, every eventParameterName at most once   observedEventParameter = eventStream / eventOther   ; For an AuditCapReply with all events, the RequestID should be ALL.   RequestID            = ( UINT32 / "*" )   modemDescriptor      = ModemToken (( EQUAL modemType) /                      (LSBRKT modemType *(COMMA modemType) RSBRKT))                     [ LBRKT propertyParm *(COMMA propertyParm) RBRKT ]   ; at-most-once except for extensionParameter   modemType            = (V32bisToken / V22bisToken / V18Token /                           V22Token / V32Token / V34Token / V90Token /                         V91Token / SynchISDNToken / extensionParameter)   digitMapDescriptor  = DigitMapToken EQUAL                        ( ( LBRKT digitMapValue RBRKT ) /                        (digitMapName [ LBRKT digitMapValue RBRKT ]) )   digitMapName        = NAME   digitMapValue       = ["T" COLON Timer COMMA] ["S" COLON Timer COMMA]                         ["L" COLON Timer COMMA] digitMap   Timer               = 1*2DIGIT   ; Units are seconds for T, S, and L timers, and hundreds of   ; milliseconds for Z timer.  Thus T, S, and L range from 1 to 99   ; seconds and Z from 100 ms to 9.9 s   digitMap = (digitString /               LWSP "(" LWSP digitStringList LWSP ")" LWSP)   digitStringList   = digitString *( LWSP "|" LWSP digitString )   digitString       = 1*(digitStringElement)   digitStringElement = digitPosition [DOT]   digitPosition     = digitMapLetter / digitMapRange   digitMapRange     = ("x" / (LWSP "[" LWSP digitLetter LWSP "]" LWSP))   digitLetter       = *((DIGIT "-" DIGIT ) / digitMapLetter)   digitMapLetter    = DIGIT   ;Basic event symbols               / %x41-4B / %x61-6B ; a-k, A-K               / "L" / "S"   ;Inter-event timers (long, short)               / "Z"         ;Long duration modifier   ;at-most-once, and DigitMapToken and PackagesToken are not allowed   ;in AuditCapabilities command   auditItem            = ( MuxToken / ModemToken / MediaToken /                           SignalsToken / EventBufferToken /                           DigitMapToken / StatsToken / EventsToken /                           ObservedEventsToken / PackagesToken )Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 122]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   serviceChangeDescriptor = ServicesToken LBRKT serviceChangeParm                            *(COMMA serviceChangeParm) RBRKT   ; each parameter at-most-once   ; at most one of either serviceChangeAddress or serviceChangeMgcId   ; but not both   ; serviceChangeMethod and serviceChangeReason are REQUIRED   serviceChangeParm    = (serviceChangeMethod / serviceChangeReason /                          serviceChangeDelay / serviceChangeAddress /                          serviceChangeProfile / extension / TimeStamp /                          serviceChangeMgcId / serviceChangeVersion )   serviceChangeReplyDescriptor = ServicesToken LBRKT                        servChgReplyParm *(COMMA servChgReplyParm) RBRKT   ; at-most-once.  Version is REQUIRED on first ServiceChange response   ; at most one of either serviceChangeAddress or serviceChangeMgcId   ; but not both   servChgReplyParm     = (serviceChangeAddress / serviceChangeMgcId /                          serviceChangeProfile / serviceChangeVersion /                          TimeStamp)   serviceChangeMethod  = MethodToken EQUAL (FailoverToken /                          ForcedToken / GracefulToken / RestartToken /                          DisconnectedToken / HandOffToken /                          extensionParameter)   ; A serviceChangeReason consists of a numeric reason code   ; and an optional text description.   ; A serviceChangeReason MUST be encoded using the quotedString   ; form of VALUE.   ; The quotedString SHALL contain a decimal reason code,   ; optionally followed by a single space character and a   ; textual description string.   serviceChangeReason  = ReasonToken  EQUAL VALUE   serviceChangeDelay   = DelayToken   EQUAL UINT32   serviceChangeAddress = ServiceChangeAddressToken EQUAL ( mId /                          portNumber )   serviceChangeMgcId   = MgcIdToken   EQUAL mId   serviceChangeProfile = ProfileToken EQUAL NAME SLASH Version   serviceChangeVersion = VersionToken EQUAL Version   extension            = extensionParameter parmValue   packagesDescriptor   = PackagesToken LBRKT packagesItem                          *(COMMA packagesItem) RBRKT   Version              = 1*2(DIGIT)   packagesItem         = NAME "-" UINT16Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 123]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   TimeStamp            = Date "T" Time ; per ISO 8601:1988   ; Date = yyyymmdd   Date                 = 8(DIGIT)   ; Time = hhmmssss   Time                 = 8(DIGIT)   statisticsDescriptor = StatsToken LBRKT statisticsParameter                         *(COMMA statisticsParameter ) RBRKT   ;at-most-once per item   statisticsParameter  = pkgdName [EQUAL VALUE]   topologyDescriptor   = TopologyToken LBRKT topologyTriple                          *(COMMA topologyTriple) RBRKT   topologyTriple       = terminationA COMMA                          terminationB COMMA topologyDirection   terminationA         = TerminationID   terminationB         = TerminationID   topologyDirection    = BothwayToken / IsolateToken / OnewayToken   priority             = PriorityToken EQUAL UINT16   extensionParameter   = "X"  ("-" / "+") 1*6(ALPHA / DIGIT)   ; octetString is used to describe SDP defined inRFC2327.   ; Caution should be taken if CRLF inRFC2327 is used.   ; To be safe, use EOL in this ABNF.   ; Whenever "}" appears in SDP, it is escaped by "\", e.g., "\}"   octetString          = *(nonEscapeChar)   nonEscapeChar        = ( "\}" / %x01-7C / %x7E-FF )   ; Note - The double-quote character is not allowed in quotedString.   quotedString         = DQUOTE *(SafeChar / RestChar/ WSP) DQUOTE   UINT16               = 1*5(DIGIT)  ; %x0-FFFF   UINT32               = 1*10(DIGIT) ; %x0-FFFFFFFF   NAME                 = ALPHA *63(ALPHA / DIGIT / "_" )   VALUE                = quotedString / 1*(SafeChar)   SafeChar             = DIGIT / ALPHA / "+" / "-" / "&" /                          "!" / "_" / "/" / "\'" / "?" / "@" /                          "^" / "`" / "~" / "*" / "$" / "\" /                          "(" / ")" / "%" / "|" / "."   EQUAL                = LWSP %x3D LWSP ; "="   COLON                = %x3A           ; ":"   LBRKT                = LWSP %x7B LWSP ; "{"   RBRKT                = LWSP %x7D LWSP ; "}"   COMMA                = LWSP %x2C LWSP ; ","Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 124]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   DOT                  = %x2E           ; "."   SLASH                = %x2F           ; "/"   ALPHA                = %x41-5A / %x61-7A ; A-Z / a-z   DIGIT                = %x30-39         ; 0-9   DQUOTE               = %x22            ; " (Double Quote)   HEXDIG               = ( DIGIT / "A" / "B" / "C" / "D" / "E" / "F" )   SP                   = %x20        ; space   HTAB                 = %x09        ; horizontal tab   CR                   = %x0D        ; Carriage return   LF                   = %x0A        ; linefeed   LWSP                 = *( WSP / COMMENT / EOL )   EOL                  = (CR [LF] / LF )   WSP                  = SP / HTAB ; white space   SEP                  = ( WSP / EOL / COMMENT) LWSP   COMMENT              = ";" *(SafeChar/ RestChar / WSP / %x22) EOL   RestChar            = ";" / "[" / "]" / "{" / "}" / ":" / "," / "#" /                          "<" / ">" / "="   ; New Tokens added to sigParameter must take the format of SPA*   ; * may be of any form i.e., SPAM   ; New Tokens added to eventParameter must take the form of EPA*   ; * may be of any form i.e., EPAD   AddToken                   = ("Add"                   / "A")   AuditToken                 = ("Audit"                 / "AT")   AuditCapToken              = ("AuditCapability"       / "AC")   AuditValueToken            = ("AuditValue"            / "AV")   AuthToken                  = ("Authentication"        / "AU")   BothwayToken               = ("Bothway"               / "BW")   BriefToken                 = ("Brief"                 / "BR")   BufferToken                = ("Buffer"                / "BF")   CtxToken                   = ("Context"               / "C")   ContextAuditToken       = ("ContextAudit"    / "CA")   DigitMapToken              = ("DigitMap"              / "DM")   DisconnectedToken          = ("Disconnected"          / "DC")   DelayToken                 = ("Delay"                 / "DL")   DurationToken              = ("Duration"              / "DR")   EmbedToken                 = ("Embed"                 / "EM")   EmergencyToken             = ("Emergency"             / "EG")   ErrorToken                 = ("Error"                 / "ER")   EventBufferToken           = ("EventBuffer"           / "EB")   EventsToken                = ("Events"                / "E")   FailoverToken              = ("Failover"              / "FL")   ForcedToken                = ("Forced"                / "FO")   GracefulToken              = ("Graceful"              / "GR")   H221Token                  = ("H221" )   H223Token                  = ("H223" )   H226Token                  = ("H226" )Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 125]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   HandOffToken               = ("HandOff"               / "HO")   ImmAckRequiredToken        = ("ImmAckRequired"        / "IA")   InactiveToken              = ("Inactive"              / "IN")   IsolateToken               = ("Isolate"               / "IS")   InSvcToken                 = ("InService"             / "IV")   InterruptByEventToken      = ("IntByEvent"            / "IBE")   InterruptByNewSignalsDescrToken                              = ("IntBySigDescr"         / "IBS")   KeepActiveToken            = ("KeepActive"            / "KA")   LocalToken                 = ("Local"                 / "L")   LocalControlToken          = ("LocalControl"          / "O")   LockStepToken              = ("LockStep"              / "SP")   LoopbackToken              = ("Loopback"              / "LB")   MediaToken                 = ("Media"                 / "M")   MegacopToken               = ("MEGACO"                / "!")   MethodToken                = ("Method"                / "MT")   MgcIdToken                 = ("MgcIdToTry"            / "MG")   ModeToken                  = ("Mode"                  / "MO")   ModifyToken                = ("Modify"                / "MF")   ModemToken                 = ("Modem"                 / "MD")   MoveToken                  = ("Move"                  / "MV")   MTPToken                   = ("MTP")   MuxToken                   = ("Mux"                   / "MX")   NotifyToken                = ("Notify"                / "N")   NotifyCompletionToken      = ("NotifyCompletion"      / "NC")   ObservedEventsToken        = ("ObservedEvents"        / "OE")   OnewayToken                = ("Oneway"                / "OW")   OnOffToken                 = ("OnOff"                 / "OO")   OtherReasonToken           = ("OtherReason"           / "OR")   OutOfSvcToken              = ("OutOfService"          / "OS")   PackagesToken              = ("Packages"              / "PG")   PendingToken               = ("Pending"               / "PN")   PriorityToken              = ("Priority"              / "PR")   ProfileToken               = ("Profile"               / "PF")   ReasonToken                = ("Reason"                / "RE")   RecvonlyToken              = ("ReceiveOnly"           / "RC")   ReplyToken                 = ("Reply"                 / "P")   RestartToken               = ("Restart"               / "RS")   RemoteToken                = ("Remote"                / "R")   ReservedGroupToken         = ("ReservedGroup"         / "RG")   ReservedValueToken         = ("ReservedValue"         / "RV")   SendonlyToken              = ("SendOnly"              / "SO")   SendrecvToken              = ("SendReceive"           / "SR")   ServicesToken              = ("Services"              / "SV")   ServiceStatesToken         = ("ServiceStates"         / "SI")   ServiceChangeToken         = ("ServiceChange"         / "SC")   ServiceChangeAddressToken  = ("ServiceChangeAddress"  / "AD")   SignalListToken            = ("SignalList"            / "SL")Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 126]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   SignalsToken               = ("Signals"               / "SG")   SignalTypeToken            = ("SignalType"            / "SY")   StatsToken                 = ("Statistics"            / "SA")   StreamToken                = ("Stream"                / "ST")   SubtractToken              = ("Subtract"              / "S")   SynchISDNToken             = ("SynchISDN"             / "SN")   TerminationStateToken      = ("TerminationState"      / "TS")   TestToken                  = ("Test"                  / "TE")   TimeOutToken               = ("TimeOut"               / "TO")   TopologyToken              = ("Topology"              / "TP")   TransToken                 = ("Transaction"           / "T")   ResponseAckToken           = ("TransactionResponseAck" / "K")   V18Token                   = ("V18")   V22Token                   = ("V22")   V22bisToken                = ("V22b")   V32Token                   = ("V32")   V32bisToken                = ("V32b")   V34Token                   = ("V34")   V76Token                   = ("V76")   V90Token                   = ("V90")   V91Token                   = ("V91")   VersionToken               = ("Version"               / "V")B.3   Hexadecimal octet coding   Hexadecimal octet coding is a means for representing a string of   octets as a string of hexadecimal digits, with two digits   representing each octet.  This octet encoding should be used when   encoding octet strings in the text version of the protocol.  For each   octet, the 8-bit sequence is encoded as two hexadecimal digits.  Bit   0 is the first transmitted; bit 7 is the last.  Bits 7-4 are encoded   as the first hexadecimal digit, with Bit 7 as MSB and Bit 4 as LSB.   Bits 3-0 are encoded as the second hexadecimal digit, with Bit 3 as   MSB and Bit 0 as LSB. Examples:        Octet bit pattern                   Hexadecimal coding        00011011                            D8        11100100                            27        10000011 10100010 11001000 00001001 C1451390B.4   Hexadecimal octet sequence   A hexadecimal octet sequence is an even number of hexadecimal digits,   terminated by a <CR> character.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 127]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003ANNEX C - Tags for media stream properties   Parameters for Local, Remote and LocalControl descriptors are   specified as tag-value pairs if binary encoding is used for the   protocol.  This annex contains the property names (PropertyID), the   tags (Property tag), type of the property (Type) and the values   (Value).  Values presented in the Value field when the field contains   references shall be regarded as "information".  The reference   contains the normative values.  If a value field does not contain a   reference, then the values in that field can be considered as   "normative".   Tags are given as hexadecimal numbers in this annex.  When setting   the value of a property, a MGC may underspecify the value according   to one of the mechanisms specified in 7.1.1.   It is optional to support the properties in this Annex or any of its   sub-sections.  For example, only three properties from C.3 and only   five properties from C.8 might be implemented.   For type "enumeration" the value is represented by the value in   brackets, e.g., Send(0), Receive(1).  Annex C properties with the   types "N bits" or "M Octets" should be treated as octet strings when   encoding the protocol.  Properties with "N bit integer" shall be   treated as an integers.  "String" shall be treated as an IA5String   when encoding the protocol.   When a type is smaller than one octet, the value shall be stored in   the low-order bits of an octet string of size 1.C.1   General media attributes   PropertyID    Property Type          Value                 tag   Media         1001     Enumeration   Audio(0), Video(1), Data(2)   Transmission  1002     Enumeration   Send(0), Receive(1),   mode                                 Send&Receive(2)   Number of     1003     Unsigned      0-255   Channels               integer   Sampling      1004     Unsigned      0-2^32   rate                   integer   Bitrate       1005     Integer       (0..4294967295)NOTE - Units of                                        100 bit/s.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 128]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   ACodec        1006     Octet string  Audio Codec Type:                                        Ref.: ITU-T Q.765                                        Non-ITU-T codecs are defined                                        with the appropriate standards                                        organization under a defined                                        Organizational Identifier.   Samplepp      1007     Unsigned      Maximum samples or frames per                          integer       packet: 0..65535   Silencesupp   1008     Boolean       Silence Suppression: True/False   Encrypttype   1009     Octet string  Ref.: ITU-T H.245   Encryptkey    100A     Octet string  Encryption key                          size          Ref.: ITU-T H.235                          (0..65535)   Echocanc      100B                    Not Used.  See H.248.1 E.13 for                                        an example of possible Echo                                        Control properties.   Gain          100C     Unsigned      Gain in dB: 0..65535                          integer   Jitterbuff    100D     Unsigned      Jitter buffer size in ms:                          integer       0..65535   PropDelay     100E     Unsigned      Propagation Delay: 0..65535                          integer       Maximum propagation delay in                                        milliseconds for the bearer                                        connection between two media                                        gateways.  The maximum delay                                        will be dependent on the bearer                                        technology.   RTPpayload    100F     Integer       Payload type in RTP Profile for                                        Audio and Video Conferences                                        with Minimal Control                                        Ref.:RFC 1890Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 129]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003C.2   Mux properties   PropertyID Property tag Type         Value   H222       2001         Octet string H222LogicalChannelParameters                                         Ref.: ITU-T H.245   H223       2002         Octet string H223LogicalChannelParameters                                         Ref.: ITU-T H.245   V76        2003         Octet string V76LogicalChannelParameters                                         Ref.: ITU-T H.245   H2250      2004         Octet string H2250LogicalChannelParameters                                         Ref.: ITU-T H.245C.3   General bearer properties   PropertyID Property   Type        Value              tag   Mediatx    3001       Enumeration Media Transport TypeTDM                                      Circuit(0), ATM(1), FR(2),                                      Ipv4(3), Ipv6(4), ...   BIR        3002       4 octets    Value depends on transport                                      technology   NSAP       3003       1-20 octets See NSAP.                                      Ref.: Annex A/X.213C.4   General ATM properties   PropertyID Property Type              Value              tag   AESA       4001     20 octets         ATM End System Address   VPVC       4002     4 octets: VPCI    VPCI/VCI                        in first two                        least             Ref.: ITU-T Q.2931                        significant                        octets, VCI in                        second two                        octetsGroves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 130]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   SC         4003     Enumeration       Service Category: CBR(0),                                          nrt-VBR1(1), nrt  VBR2(2),                                          nrt-VBR3(3), rt-VBR1(4),                                          rt  VBR2(5), rt-VBR3(6),                                          UBR1(7), UBR2(8), ABR(9).                                          Ref.: ATM Forum UNI 4.0   BCOB       4004     5-bit integer     Broadband Bearer Class                                          Ref.: ITU-T Q.2961.2   BBTC       4005     7-bit integer     Broadband Transfer Capability                                          Ref.: ITU-T Q.2961.1   ATC        4006     Enumeration       I.371 ATM Traffic                                          CapabilityDBR(0), SBR1(1),                                          SBR2(2), SBR3(3), ABT/IT(4),                                          ABT/DT(5), ABR(6)                                          Ref.: ITU-T I.371   STC        4007     2 bits            Susceptibility to clipping:                                          Bits                                          2 1                                          ---                                          0 0     not susceptible to                                                  clipping                                          0 1     susceptible to                                                  clipping                                          Ref.: ITU-T Q.2931   UPCC       4008     2 bits            User Plane Connection                                          configuration:                                          Bits                                          2 1                                          ---                                          0 0     point-to-point                                          0 1     point-to-multipoint                                          Ref.: ITU-T Q.2931   PCR0       4009     24-bit integer    Peak Cell Rate (For CLP = 0)                                          Ref.: ITU-T Q.2931   SCR0       400A     24-bit integer    Sustainable Cell Rate (For                                          CLP = 0)                                          Ref.: ITU-T Q.2961.1   MBS0       400B     24-bit integer    Maximum Burst Size (For CLP =                                          0)                                          Ref.: ITU-T Q.2961.1Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 131]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   PCR1       400C     24-bit integer    Peak Cell Rate (For CLP = 0 +                                          1)                                          Ref.: ITU-T Q.2931   SCR1       400D     24-bit integer    Sustainable Cell Rate (For                                          CLP = 0 + 1)                                          Ref.: ITU-T Q.2961.1   MBS1       400E     24-bit integer    Maximum Burst Size (For CLP =                                          0 + 1)                                          Ref.: ITU-T Q.2961.1   BEI        400F     Boolean           Best Effort Indicator                                          Value 1 indicates that BEI is                                          to be included in the ATM                                          signaling; value 0 indicates                                          that BEI is not to be                                          included in the ATM                                          signaling.                                          Ref.: ATM Forum UNI 4.0   TI         4010     Boolean           Tagging Indicator                                          Value 0 indicates that                                          tagging is not allowed; value                                          1 indicates that tagging is                                          requested.                                          Ref.: ITU-T Q.2961.1   FD         4011     Boolean           Frame Discard                                          Value 0 indicates that no                                          frame discard is allowed;                                          value 1 indicates that frame                                          discard is allowed.                                          Ref.: ATM Forum UNI 4.0   A2PCDV     4012     24-bit integer    Acceptable 2-point CDV                                          Ref.: ITU-T Q.2965.2   C2PCDV     4013     24-bit integer    Cumulative 2-point CDV                                          Ref.: ITU-T Q.2965.2   APPCDV     4014     24-bit integer    Acceptable P-P CDV                                          Ref.: ATM Forum UNI 4.0   CPPCDV     4015     24-bit integer    Cumulative P-P CDV                                          Ref.: ATM Forum UNI 4.0Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 132]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   ACLR       4016     8-bit integer     Acceptable Cell Loss Ratio                                          Ref.: ITU-T Q.2965.2, ATM                                          Forum UNI 4.0   MEETD      4017     16-bit integer    Maximum End-to-end transit                                          delay                                          Ref.: ITU-T Q.2965.2, ATM                                          Forum UNI 4.0   CEETD      4018     16-bit integer    Cumulative End-to-end transit                                          delay                                          Ref.: ITU-T Q.2965.2, ATM                                          Forum UNI 4.0   QosClass   4019     Integer 0-5          QoS Class                                            QoS Class     Meaning                                            0             Default QoS                                                           associated                                                           with the ATC                                                           as defined                                                           in ITU-T                                                           Q.2961.2                                            1             Stringent                                            2             Tolerant                                            3             Bi-level                                            4             Unbounded                                            5             Stringent                                                           Bi-level                                          Ref.: ITU-T Q.2965.1   AALtype    401A     1 octet           AAL Type                                          Bits                                          8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1                                          ---------------                                          0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0   AAL for                                                            voice                                          0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1   AAL type 1                                          0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0   AAL type 2                                          0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1   AAL type                                                            3/4                                          0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1   AAL type 5Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 133]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003                                          0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0   user-                                                            defined AAL                                          Ref.: ITU-T Q.2931C.5   Frame Relay   PropertyID         Property    Type          Value                      tag   DLCI               5001        Unsigned      Data link connection                                  integer       id   CID                5002        Unsigned      sub-channel id                                  integer   SID/Noiselevel     5003        Unsigned      silence insertion                                  integer       descriptor   Primary Payload    5004        Unsigned      Primary Payload Type   type                           integer       Covers FAX and codecsC.6   IP   PropertyID Property tag Type                Value   IPv4       6001         32 bits Ipv4Address Ipv4Address                                                Ref.: IETFRFC 791   IPv6       6002         128 bits            IPv6 Address                                                Ref.: IETFRFC 2460   Port       6003         Unsigned integer    0..65535   Porttype   6004         Enumerated          TCP(0), UDP(1), SCTP(2)C.7   ATM AAL2   PropertyID Property Type                   Value              tag   AESA       7001     20 octets              AAL2 service endpoint                                                address as defined in                                                the referenced                                                Recommendation.                                                ESEANSEA                                                Ref.: ITU-T Q.2630.1Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 134]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   BIR        See C.3  4 octets               Served user generated                                                reference as defined in                                                the referenced                                                Recommendation.                                                SUGR                                                Ref.: ITU-T Q.2630.1   ALC        7002     12 octets              AAL2 link                                                characteristics as                                                defined in the                                                referenced                                                Recommendation.                                                Maximum/Average CPS-SDU                                                bit rate;                                                Maximum/Average CPS-SDU                                                size                                                Ref.: ITU-T Q.2630.1   SSCS       7003     I.366.2: Audio (8      Service specific                        octets); Multirate (3  convergence sublayer                        octets), or I.366.1:   information as defined                        SAR-assured (14        in:                        octets);SAR-unassured  - ITU-T Q.2630.1,and                        (7 octets).            used in:                                                - ITU-T I.366.2:                                                Audio/Multirate;                                                - ITU-T I.366.1: SAR-                                                assured/unassured.                                                Ref.: ITU-T Q.2630.1,                                                I.366.1 and I.366.2   SUT        7004     1..254 octets          Served user transport                                                parameter as defined in                                                the referenced                                                Recommendation.                                                Ref.: ITU-T Q.2630.1   TCI        7005     Boolean                Test connection                                                indicator as defined in                                                the referenced                                                Recommendation.                                                Ref.: ITU-T Q.2630.1   Timer_CU   7006     32-bit integer         Timer-CU                                                Milliseconds to hold                                                partially filled cell                                                before sending.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 135]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   MaxCPSSDU  7007     8-bit integer          Maximum Common Part                                                Sublayer Service Data                                                Unit                                                Ref.: ITU-T Q.2630.1   CID        7008     8 bits                 subchannel id: 0-255                                                Ref.: ITU-T I.363.2C.8   ATM AAL1   PropertyID Property   Type        Value              tag   BIR        See table  4-29 octets GIT (Generic Identifier              in C.3                 Transport)                                      Ref.: ITU-T Q.2941.1   AAL1ST     8001       1 octet     AAL1 Subtype                                      Bits                                      8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1                                      ---------------                                      0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0     null                                      0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1     voiceband                                      signal transport on 64 kbit/s                                      0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0     circuit                                      transport                                      0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0     high-quality                                      audio signal transport                                      0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1     video signal                                      transport                                      Ref.: ITU-T Q.2931   CBRR       8002       1 octet     CBR Rate                                      Bits                                      8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1                                      ---------------                                      0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1       64 kbit/s                                      0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0     1544 kbit/s                                      0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1     6312 kbit/s                                      0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0   32 064 kbit/s                                      0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1   44 736 kbit/s                                      0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0   97 728 kbit/s                                      0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0     2048 kbit/s                                      0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1     8448 kbit/s                                      0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0   34 368 kbit/s                                      0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1  139 264 kbit/s                                      0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0   n x 64 kbit/s                                      0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1    n x 8 kbit/s                                      Ref.: ITU-T Q.2931Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 136]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   MULT       See table              Multiplier, or n x 64k/8k/300              in C.9                 Ref.: ITU-T Q.2931   SCRI       8003       1 octet     Source Clock Frequency Recovery                                      Method                                      Bits                                      8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1                                      ---------------                                      0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0     null                                      0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1     SRTS                                      0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0     ACM                                      Ref.: ITU-T Q.2931   ECM        8004       1 octet     Error Correction Method                                      Bits                                      8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1                                      ---------------                                      0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0     null                                      0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1     FEC - Loss                                      0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0     FEC - Delay                                      Ref.: ITU-T Q.2931   SDTB       8005       16-bit      Structured Data Transfer                         integer     Blocksize                                      Block size of SDT CBR service                                      Ref.: ITU-T I.363.1   PFCI       8006       8-bit       Partially filled cells identifier                         integer     1-47                                      Ref.: ITU-T I.363.1C.9   Bearer capabilities   The table entries referencing Recommendation Q.931 refer to the   encoding in the bearer capability information element of Q.931, not   to the low layer information element.   PropertyID    Tag    Type      Value   TMR           9001   1 octet   Transmission Medium                                  Requirement (Q.763)                                  Bits                                  87654321                                  --------                                  00000000  speech                                  00000001  spare                                  00000010  64 kbit/s                                  unrestrictedGroves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 137]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003                                  00000011  3.1 kHz audio                                  00000100  reserved for                                  alternate speech (service                                  2)/64 kbit/s unrestricted                                  (service 1)                                  00000101  reserved for                                  alternate 64 kbit/s                                  unrestricted (service                                  1)/speech (service 2)                                  00000110  64 kbit/s preferred                                  The assigned codepoints                                  listed below are all for                                  unrestricted service.                                  00000111  2 x 64 kbit/s                                  00001000  384 kbit/s                                  00001001  1536 kbit/s                                  00001010  1920 kbit/s                                  00001011                                   through                                  00001111  spare                                  00010000                                   through                                  00101010:                                     3 x 64 kbit/s through                                    29 x 64 kbit/s                                  except                                  00010011  spare                                  00100101  spare                                  00101011                                   through                                  11111111  spare                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.763   TMRSR         9002   1 octet   Transmission Medium                                  Requirement Subrate                                  0     unspecified                                  1      8 kbit/s                                  2     16 kbit/s                                  3     32 kbit/s   Contcheck     9003   Boolean   Continuity Check                                  0     continuity check not                                  required on this circuit                                  1     continuity check                                  required on this circuit                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.763Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 138]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   ITC           9004   5 bits    Information Transfer                                  Capability                                  Bits                                  5 4 3 2 1                                  ---------                                  0 0 0 0 0     Speech                                  0 1 0 0 0     Unrestricted                                  digital information                                  0 1 0 0 1     Restricted                                  digital information                                  1 0 0 0 0     3.1 kHz audio                                  1 0 0 0 1     Unrestricted                                  digital information with                                  tones/announcements                                  1 1 0 0 0     Video                                  All other values are                                  reserved.                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.763   TransMode     9005   2 bits    Transfer Mode                                  Bits                                  2 1                                  ---                                  0 0     Circuit mode                                  1 0     Packet mode                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931   TransRate     9006   5 bits    Transfer Rate                                  Bits                                  5 4 3 2 1                                  ---------                                  0 0 0 0 0     This code shall                                  be used for packet mode calls                                  1 0 0 0 0      64 kbit/s                                  1 0 0 0 1  2 x 64 kbit/s                                  1 0 0 1 1     384 kbit/s                                  1 0 1 0 1    1536 kbit/s                                  1 0 1 1 1    1920 kbit/s                                  1 1 0 0 0  Multirate (64                                  kbit/s base rate)                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931   MULT          9007   7 bits    Rate Multiplier                                  Any value from 2 to n                                  (maximum number of B-                                  channels)                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 139]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   layer1prot    9008   5 bits    User Information Layer 1                                  Protocol                                  Bits                                  5 4 3 2 1                                  ---------                                  0 0 0 0 1     ITU-T                                  standardized rate adaption                                  V.110 and X.30.                                  0 0 0 1 0     Recommendation                                  G.711 m-law                                  0 0 0 1 1     Recommendation                                  G.711 A-law                                  0 0 1 0 0     Recommendation                                  G.721 32 kbit/s ADPCM and                                  Recommendation I.460                                  0 0 1 0 1     Recommendations                                  H.221 and H.242                                  0 0 1 1 0     Recommendations                                  H.223 and H.245                                  0 0 1 1 1     Non-ITU-T                                  standardized rate adaption.                                  0 1 0 0 0     ITU-T                                  standardized rate adaption                                  V.120.                                  0 1 0 0 1     ITU-T                                  standardized rate adaption                                  X.31 HDLC flag stuffing                                  All other values are                                  reserved.                                  Ref.: ITU Recommendation                                  Q.931   syncasync     9009   Boolean   Synchronous/Asynchronous                                  0     Synchronous data                                  1     Asynchronous data                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931   negotiation   900A   Boolean   Negotiation                                  0     In-band negotiation                                  possible                                  1     In-band negotiation not                                  possible                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931   Userrate      900B   5 bits    User Rate                                  Bits                                  5 4 3 2 1Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 140]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003                                  ---------                                  0 0 0 0 0     Rate is                                  indicated by E-bits specified                                  in Recommendation I.460 or                                  may be negotiated in-band                                  0 0 0 0 1     0.6 kbit/s                                  Recommendations V.6 and X.1                                  0 0 0 1 0     1.2 kbit/s                                  Recommendation V.6                                  0 0 0 1 1     2.4 kbit/s                                  Recommendations V.6 and X.1                                  0 0 1 0 0     3.6 kbit/s                                  Recommendation V.6                                  0 0 1 0 1     4.8 kbit/s                                  Recommendations V.6 and X.1                                  0 0 1 1 0     7.2 kbit/s                                  Recommendation V.6                                  0 0 1 1 1     8 kbit/s                                  Recommendation I.460                                  0 1 0 0 0     9.6 kbit/s                                  Recommendations V.6 and X.1                                  0 1 0 0 1     14.4 kbit/s                                  Recommendation V.6                                  0 1 0 1 0     16 kbit/s                                  Recommendation I.460                                  0 1 0 1 1     19.2 kbit/s                                  Recommendation V.6                                  0 1 1 0 0     32 kbit/s                                  Recommendation I.460                                  0 1 1 0 1     38.4 kbit/s                                  Recommendation V.110                                  0 1 1 1 0     48 kbit/s                                  Recommendations V.6 and X.1                                  0 1 1 1 1     56 kbit/s                                  Recommendation V.6                                  1 0 0 1 0     57.6 kbit/s                                  Recommendation V.14 extended                                  1 0 0 1 1     28.8 kbit/s                                  Recommendation V.110                                  1 0 1 0 0     24 kbit/s                                  Recommendation V.110                                  1 0 1 0 1     0.1345 kbit/s                                  Recommendation X.1                                  1 0 1 1 0     0.100 kbit/s                                  Recommendation X.1                                  1 0 1 1 1     0.075/1.2                                  kbit/s Recommendations V.6                                  and X.1Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 141]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003                                  1 1 0 0 0     1.2/0.075                                  kbit/s Recommendations V.6                                  and X.1                                  1 1 0 0 1     0.050 kbit/s                                  Recommendations V.6 and X.1                                  1 1 0 1 0     0.075 kbit/s                                  Recommendations V.6 and X.1                                  1 1 0 1 1     0.110 kbit/s                                  Recommendations V.6 and X.1                                  1 1 1 0 0     0.150 kbit/s                                  Recommendations V.6 and X.1                                  1 1 1 0 1     0.200 kbit/s                                  Recommendations V.6 and X.1                                  1 1 1 1 0     0.300 kbit/s                                  Recommendations V.6 and X.1                                  1 1 1 1 1     12 kbit/s                                  Recommendation V.6                                  All other values are                                  reserved.                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931   INTRATE       900C   2 bits    Intermediate Rate                                  Bits                                  2 1                                  ---                                  0 0     Not used                                  0 1     8 kbit/s                                  1 0     16 kbit/s                                  1 1     32 kbit/s                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931   nictx         900D   Boolean   Network Independent Clock                                  (NIC) on transmission                                  0     Not required to send                                  data with network independent                                  clock                                  1     Required to send data                                  with network independent                                  clock                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931   nicrx         900E   Boolean   Network independent clock                                  (NIC) on reception                                  0     Cannot accept data with                                  network independent clock                                  (i.e., sender does not support                                  this optional procedure)                                  1     Can accept data with                                  network independent clockGroves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 142]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003                                  (i.e., sender does support                                  this optional procedure)                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931   flowconttx    900F   Boolean   Flow Control on transmission                                  (Tx)                                  0     Not required to send                                  data with flow control                                  mechanism                                  1     Required to send data                                  with flow control mechanism                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931   flowcontrx    9010   Boolean   Flow control on reception                                  (Rx)                                  0     Cannot accept data with                                  flow control mechanism (i.e.,                                  sender does not support this                                  optional procedure)                                  1     Can accept data with                                  flow control mechanism (i.e.,                                  sender does support this                                  optional procedure)                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931   rateadapthdr  9011   Boolean   Rate adaption header/no                                  header                                  0     Rate adaption header                                  not included                                  1     Rate adaption header                                  included                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931   multiframe    9012   Boolean   Multiple frame establishment                                  support in data link                                  0     Multiple frame                                  establishment not supported.                                  Only UI frames allowed                                  1     Multiple frame                                  establishment supported                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931   OPMODE        9013   Boolean   Mode of operation                                  0     Bit transparent mode of                                  operation                                  1     Protocol sensitive mode                                  of operation                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 143]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   llidnegot     9014   Boolean   Logical link identifier                                  negotiation                                  0     Default, LLI = 256 only                                  1     Full protocol                                  negotiation                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931   assign        9015   Boolean   Assignor/assignee                                  0     Message originator is                                  "default assignee"                                  1     Message originator is                                  "assignor only"                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931   inbandneg     9016   Boolean   In-band/out-band negotiation                                  0     Negotiation is done                                  with USER INFORMATION                                  messages on a temporary                                  signalling connection                                  1     Negotiation is done in-                                  band using logical link zero                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931   stopbits      9017   2 bits    Number of stop bits                                  Bits                                  2 1                                  ---                                  0 0     Not used                                  0 1     1 bit                                  1 0     1.5 bits                                  1 1     2 bits                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931   databits      9018   2 bits    Number of data bits excluding                                  parity bit if present                                  Bits                                  2 1                                  ---                                  0 0     Not used                                  0 1     5 bits                                  1 0     7 bits                                  1 1     8 bits                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931   parity        9019   3 bits    Parity information                                  Bits                                  3 2 1Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 144]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003                                  ------                                  0 0 0     Odd                                  0 1 0     Even                                  0 1 1     None                                  1 0 0     Forced to 0                                  1 0 1     Forced to 1                                  All other values are                                  reserved.                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931   duplexmode    901A   Boolean   Mode duplex                                  0     Half duplex                                  1     Full duplex                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931   modem         901B   6 bits    Modem Type                                  Bits                                  6 5 4 3 2 1                                  -----------                                  0 0 0 0 0 0 through                                  0 0 0 1 0 1   National use                                  0 1 0 0 0 1   Rec.  V.21                                  0 1 0 0 1 0     Rec.  V.22                                  0 1 0 0 1 1     Rec.  V.22 bis                                  0 1 0 1 0 0     Rec.  V.23                                  0 1 0 1 0 1     Rec.  V.26                                  0 1 1 0 0 1     Rec.  V.26 bis                                  0 1 0 1 1 1     Rec.  V.26 ter                                  0 1 1 0 0 0     Rec.  V.27                                  0 1 1 0 0 1     Rec.  V.27 bis                                  0 1 1 0 1 0     Rec.  V.27 ter                                  0 1 1 0 1 1     Rec.  V.29                                  0 1 1 1 0 1     Rec.  V.32                                  0 1 1 1 1 0     Rec.  V.34                                  1 0 0 0 0 0  through                                  1 0 1 1 1 1    National use                                  1 1 0 0 0 0  through                                  1 1 1 1 1 1    User specified                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931   layer2prot    901C   5 bits    User information layer 2                                  protocol                                  Bits                                  5 4 3 2 1                                  ---------                                  0 0 0 1 0    Rec.  Q.921/I.441                                  0 0 1 1 0    Rec.  X.25, link                                  layerGroves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 145]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003                                  0 1 1 0 0    LAN logical link                                  control (ISO/IEC 8802  2)                                  All other values are                                  reserved.                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931   layer3prot    901D   5 bits    User information layer 3                                  protocol                                  Bits                                  5 4 3 2 1                                  ---------                                  0 0 0 1 0     ITU-T Q.931                                  0 0 1 1 0     ITU-T X.25,                                  packet layer                                  0 1 0 1 1     ISO/IEC TR 9577                                  (Protocol identification in                                  the network layer)                                  All other values are                                  reserved.                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931   addlayer3prot 901E   Octet     Additional User Information                                  layer 3 protocol                                  Bits        Bits                                  4 3 2 1     4 3 2 1                                  -------     -------                                  1 1 0 0     1 1 0 0                                  Internet Protocol (RFC 791)                                  (ISO/IEC TR 9577)                                  1 1 0 0     1 1 1 1                                  Point-to-point Protocol (RFC1661)                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.931   DialledN      901F   30        Dialled Number                        octets   DiallingN     9020   30        Dialling Number                        octets   ECHOCI        9021             Not Used.  See H.248.1 E.13                                  for an example of possible                                  Echo Control properties.   NCI           9022   1 octet   Nature of Connection                                  Indicators                                  Bits                                  2 1     Satellite IndicatorGroves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 146]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003                                  ---                                  0 0     no satellite circuit                                  in the connection                                  0 1     one satellite circuit                                  in the connection                                  1 0     two satellite                                  circuits in the connection                                  1 1     spare                                  Bits                                  4 3     Continuity check                                  ---     indicator                                  0 0     continuity check not                                  required                                  0 1     continuity check                                  required on this circuit                                  1 0     continuity check                                  performed on a previous                                  circuit                                  1 1     spare                                  Bit                                  5     Echo control device                                  -     indicator                                  0     outgoing echo control                                  device not included                                  1     outgoing echo control                                  device included                                  Bits                                  8 7 6     Spare                                  Ref.: ITU-T Q.763   USI           9023   Octet     User Service Information                        string    Ref.: ITU-T Q.763 Clause 3.57C.10  AAL5 properties   PropertyID Property    Type       Value              tag   FMSDU      A001        32-bit     Forward Maximum CPCS-SDU Size:                          integer    Maximum CPCS-SDU size sent in the                                     direction from the calling user to                                     the called user.                                     Ref.: ITU-T Q.2931Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 147]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   BMSDU      A002        32-bit     Backwards Maximum CPCS-SDU Size:                          integer    Maximum CPCS-SDU size sent in the                                     direction from the called user to                                     the calling user.                                     Ref.: ITU-T Q.2931   SSCS       See table   See table  See table in C.7              in C.7      in C.7     Additional values:                                     VPI/VCIC.11  SDP equivalents   PropertyID Property    Type   Value              tag   SDP_V      B001        String Protocol Version                                  Ref.:RFC 2327   SDP_O      B002        String Owner/creator and session ID                                  Ref.:RFC 2327   SDP_S      B003        String Session name                                  Ref.:RFC 2327   SDP_I      B004        String Session identifier                                  Ref.:RFC 2327   SDP_U      B005        String URI of descriptor                                  Ref.:RFC 2327   SDC_E      B006        String email address                                  Ref.:RFC 2327   SDP_P      B007        String phone number                                  Ref.:RFC 2327   SDP_C      B008        String Connection information                                  Ref.:RFC 2327   SDP_B      B009        String Bandwidth Information                                  Ref.:RFC 2327   SDP_Z      B00A        String Time zone adjustment                                  Ref.:RFC 2327   SDP_K      B00B        String Encryption Key                                  Ref.:RFC 2327Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 148]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   SDP_A      B00C        String Zero or more session attributes                                  Ref.:RFC 2327   SDP_T      B00D        String Active Session Time                                  Ref.:RFC 2327   SDP_R      B00E        String Zero or more repeat times                                  Reference:RFC 2327   SDP_M      B00F        String Media type, port, transport and format                                  Ref.:RFC 2327C.12  H.245   PropertyID Property   Type     Value              tag   OLC        C001       Octet    The value of H.245                                   OpenLogicalChannel structure.                         string   Ref.: ITU-T H.245   OLCack     C002       Octet    The value of H.245                         string   OpenLogicalChannelAck structure.                                   Ref.: ITU-T H.245   OLCcnf     C003       Octet    The value of H.245                         string   OpenLogicalChannelConfirm structure.                                   Ref.: ITU-T H.245   OLCrej     C004       Octet    The value of H.245                         string   OpenLogicalChannelReject structure.                                   Ref.: ITU-T H.245   CLC        C005       Octet    The value of H.245                         string   CloseLogicalChannel structure.                                   Ref.: ITU-T H.245   CLCack     C006       Octet    The value of H.245                         string   CloseLogicalChannelAck structure.                                   Ref.: ITU-T H.245Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 149]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003ANNEX D - Transport over IPD.1   Transport over IP/UDP using Application Level Framing (ALF)   Protocol messages defined in this RFC may be transmitted over UDP.   When no port is provided by the peer (see 7.2.8), commands should be   sent to the default port number: 2944 for text-encoded operation, or   2945 for binary-encoded operation.  Responses must be sent to the   address and port from which the corresponding commands were sent.   ALF is a set of techniques that allows an application, as opposed to   a stack, to affect how messages are sent to the other side.  A   typical ALF technique is to allow an application to change the order   of messages sent when there is a queue after it has queued them.   There is no formal specification for ALF.  The procedures in Annex   D.1 contain a minimum suggested set of ALF behaviours   Implementors using IP/UDP with ALF should be aware of the   restrictions of the MTU on the maximum message size.D.1.1 Providing At-Most-Once functionality   Messages, being carried over UDP, may be subject to losses.  In the   absence of a timely response, commands are repeated.  Most commands   are not idempotent.  The state of the MG would become unpredictable   if, for example, Add commands were executed several times.  The   transmission procedures shall thus provide an "At-Most-Once"   functionality.   Peer protocol entities are expected to keep in memory a list of the   responses that they sent to recent transactions and a list of the   transactions that are currently outstanding.  The transaction   identifier of each incoming message is compared to the transaction   identifiers of the recent responses sent to the same MId.  If a match   is found, the entity does not execute the transaction, but simply   repeats the response.  If no match is found, the message will be   compared to the list of currently outstanding transactions.  If a   match is found in that list, indicating a duplicate transaction, the   entity does not execute the transaction (see D.1.4 for procedures on   sending TransactionPending).   The procedure uses a long timer value, noted LONG-TIMER in the   following.  The timer should be set larger than the maximum duration   of a transaction, which should take into account the maximum numberGroves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 150]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   of repetitions, the maximum value of the repetition timer and the   maximum propagation delay of a packet in the network.  A suggested   value is 30 seconds.   The copy of the responses may be destroyed either LONG-TIMER seconds   after the response is issued, or when the entity receives a   confirmation that the response has been received, through the   "Response Acknowledgement parameter".  For transactions that are   acknowledged through this parameter, the entity shall keep a copy of   the transaction-id for LONG-TIMER seconds after the response is   issued, in order to detect and ignore duplicate copies of the   transaction request that could be produced by the network.D.1.2 Transaction identifiers and three-way handshakeD.1.2.1  Transaction identifiers   Transaction identifiers are 32-bit integer numbers.  A Media Gateway   Controller may decide to use a specific number space for each of the   MGs that they manage, or to use the same number space for all MGs   that belong to some arbitrary group.  MGCs may decide to share the   load of managing a large MG between several independent processes.   These processes will share the same transaction number space.  There   are multiple possible implementations of this sharing, such as having   a centralized allocation of transaction identifiers, or   pre-allocating non-overlapping ranges of identifiers to different   processes.  The implementations shall guarantee that unique   transaction identifiers are allocated to all transactions that   originate from a logical MGC (identical mId).  MGs can simply detect   duplicate transactions by looking at the transaction identifier and   mId only.D.1.2.2  Three-way handshake   The TransactionResponse Acknowledgement parameter can be found in any   message.  It carries a set of "confirmed transaction-id ranges".   Entities may choose to delete the copies of the responses to   transactions whose id is included in "confirmed transaction-id   ranges" received in the transaction response messages.  They should   silently discard further commands when the transaction-id falls   within these ranges.   The "confirmed transaction-id ranges" values shall not be used if   more than LONG-TIMER seconds have elapsed since the MG issued its   last response to that MGC, or when a MG resumes operation.  In this   situation, transactions should be accepted and processed, without any   test on the transaction-id.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 151]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   Messages that carry the "Transaction Response Acknowledgement"   parameter may be transmitted in any order.  The entity shall retain   the "confirmed transaction-id ranges" received for LONG-TIMER   seconds.   In the binary encoding, if only the firstAck is present in a response   acknowledgement (see A.2), only one transaction is acknowledged.  If   both firstAck and lastAck are present, then the range of transactions   from firstAck to lastAck is acknowledged.  In the text encoding, a   horizontal dash is used to indicate a range of transactions being   acknowledged (see B.2).D.1.3 Computing retransmission timers   It is the responsibility of the requesting entity to provide suitable   timeouts for all outstanding transactions, and to retry transactions   when timeouts have been exceeded.  Furthermore, when repeated   transactions fail to be acknowledged, it is the responsibility of the   requesting entity to seek redundant services and/or clear existing or   pending connections.   The specification purposely avoids specifying any value for the   retransmission timers.  These values are typically network dependent.   The retransmission timers should normally estimate the timer value by   measuring the time spent between the sending of a command and the   return of a response.  Implementations SHALL ensure that the   algorithm used to calculate retransmission timing performs an   exponentially increasing backoff of the retransmission timeout for   each retransmission or repetition after the first one.     NOTE - One possibility is to use the algorithm implemented in     TCP-IP, which uses two variables:   -  The average acknowledgement delay (AAD), estimated through an      exponentially smoothed average of the observed delays.   -  The average deviation (ADEV), estimated through an exponentially      smoothed average of the absolute value of the difference between      the observed delay and the current average.  The retransmission      timer, in TCP, is set to the sum of the average delay plus N times      the average deviation.  The maximum value of the timer should      however be bounded for the protocol defined in this      RFC, in order to guarantee that no repeated packet      would be received by the gateways after LONG-TIMER seconds.  A      suggested maximum value is 4 seconds.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 152]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   After any retransmission, the entity SHOULD do the following:   -  It should double the estimated value of the average delay, AAD.   -  It should compute a random value, uniformly distributed between      0.5 AAD and AAD.   -  It should set the retransmission timer to the sum of that random      value and N times the average deviation.   This procedure has two effects.  Because it includes an exponentially   increasing component, it will automatically slow down the stream of   messages in case of congestion.  Because it includes a random   component, it will break the potential synchronization between   notifications triggered by the same external event.D.1.4 Provisional responses   Executing some transactions may require a long time.  Long execution   times may interact with the timer-based retransmission procedure.   This may result either in an inordinate number of retransmissions, or   in timer values that become too long to be efficient.  Entities that   can predict that a transaction will require a long execution time may   send a provisional response, "Transaction Pending".  They SHOULD send   this response if they receive a repetition of a transaction that is   still being executed.   Entities that receive a Transaction Pending shall switch to a   different repetition timer for repeating requests.  The root   Termination has a property (ProvisionalResponseTimerValue), which can   be set to the requested maximum number of milliseconds between   receipt of a command and transmission of the TransactionPending   response.  Upon receipt of a final response following receipt of   provisional responses, an immediate confirmation shall be sent, and   normal repetition timers shall be used thereafter.  An entity that   sends a provisional response, SHALL include the immAckRequired field   in the ensuing final response, indicating that an immediate   confirmation is expected.  Receipt of a Transaction Pending after   receipt of a reply shall be ignored.D.1.5 Repeating Requests, Responses and Acknowledgements   The protocol is organized as a set of transactions, each of which is   composed of a request and a response, commonly referred to as an   acknowledgement.  The protocol messages, being carried over UDP, may   be subject to losses.  In the absence of a timely response,   transactions are repeated.  Entities are expected to keep in memory aGroves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 153]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   list of the responses that they sent to recent transactions, i.e., a   list of all the responses they sent over the last LONG-TIMER seconds,   and a list of the transactions that are currently being executed.   The repetition mechanism is used to guard against three types of   possible errors:   -  transmission errors, when for example a packet is lost due to      noise on a line or congestion in a queue;   -  component failure, when for example an interface to a entity      becomes unavailable;   -  entity failure, when for example an entire entity becomes      unavailable.   The entities should be able to derive from the past history an   estimate of the packet loss rate due to transmission errors.  In a   properly configured system, this loss rate should be kept very low,   typically less than 1%.  If a Media Gateway Controller or a Media   Gateway has to repeat a message more than a few times, it is very   legitimate to assume that something else than a transmission error is   occurring.   For example, given a loss rate of 1%, the probability   that five consecutive transmission attempts fail is 1 in 100 billion,   an event that should occur less than once every 10 days for a Media   Gateway Controller that processes 1000 transactions per second.   (Indeed, the number of repetition that is considered excessive should   be a function of the prevailing packet loss rate.)  We should note   that the "suspicion threshold", which we will call "Max1", is   normally lower than the "disconnection threshold", which should be   set to a larger value.   A classic retransmission algorithm would simply count the number of   successive repetitions, and conclude that the association is broken   after retransmitting the packet an excessive number of times   (typically between 7 and 11 times.)  In order to account for the   possibility of an undetected or in  progress "failover", we modify   the classic algorithm so that if the Media Gateway receives a valid   ServiceChange message announcing a failover, it will start   transmitting outstanding commands to that new MGC.  Responses to   commands are still transmitted to the source address of the command.   In order to automatically adapt to network load, this RFC specifies   exponentially increasing timers.  If the initial timer is set to 200   milliseconds, the loss of a fifth retransmission will be detected   after about 6 seconds.  This is probably an acceptable waiting delay   to detect a failover.  The repetitions should continue after that   delay not only in order to perhaps overcome a transient connectivityGroves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 154]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   problem, but also in order to allow some more time for the execution   of a failover  (waiting a total delay of 30 seconds is probably   acceptable).   It is, however, important that the maximum delay of retransmissions   be bounded.  Prior to any retransmission, it is checked that the time   elapsed since the sending of the initial datagram is no greater than   T-MAX.  If more than T-MAX time has elapsed, the MG concludes that   the MGC has failed, and it begins its recovery process as described   insection 11.5.  If the MG retries to connect to the current MGC it   shall use a ServiceChange with ServiceChangeMethod set to   Disconnected so that the new MGC will be aware that the MG lost one   or more transactions.  The value T-MAX is related to the LONG-TIMER   value: the LONG-TIMER value is obtained by adding to T  MAX the   maximum propagation delay in the network.D.2   Using TCP   Protocol messages as defined in this RFC may be transmitted over TCP.   When no port is specified by the other side (see 7.2.8), the commands   should be sent to the default port.  The defined protocol has   messages as the unit of transfer, while TCP is a stream-oriented   protocol.  TPKT, according toRFC 1006, SHALL be used to delineate   messages within the TCP stream.   In a transaction-oriented protocol, there are still ways for   transaction requests or responses to be lost.  As such, it is   recommended that entities using TCP transport implement application   level timers for each request and each response, similar to those   specified for application level framing over UDP.D.2.1 Providing the At-Most-Once functionality   Messages, being carried over TCP, are not subject to transport   losses, but loss of a transaction request or its reply may   nonetheless be noted in real implementations.  In the absence of a   timely response, commands are repeated.  Most commands are not   idempotent.  The state of the MG would become unpredictable if, for   example, Add commands were executed several times.   To guard against such losses, it is recommended that entities follow   the procedures in D.1.1.D.2.2 Transaction identifiers and three-way handshake   For the same reasons, it is possible that transaction replies may be   lost even with a reliable delivery protocol such as TCP.  It is   recommended that entities follow the procedures in D.1.2.2.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 155]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003D.2.3 Computing retransmission timers   With reliable delivery, the incidence of loss of a transaction   request or reply is expected to be very low.  Therefore, only simple   timer mechanisms are required.  Exponential back-off algorithms   should not be necessary, although they could be employed where, as in   an MGC, the code to do so is already required, since MGCs must   implement ALF/UDP as well as TCP.D.2.4 Provisional responses   As with UDP, executing some transactions may require a long time.   Entities that can predict that a transaction will require a long   execution time may send a provisional response, "Transaction   Pending".  They should send this response if they receive a   repetition of a transaction that is still being executed.   Entities that receive a Transaction Pending shall switch to a longer   repetition timer for that transaction.   Entities shall retain Transactions and replies until they are   confirmed.  The basic procedure of D.1.4 should be followed, but   simple timer values should be sufficient.  There is no need to send   an immediate confirmation upon receipt of a final response.D.2.5 Ordering of commands   TCP provides ordered delivery of transactions.  No special procedures   are required.  It should be noted that ALF/UDP allows sending entity   to modify its behaviour under congestion, and in particular, could   reorder transactions when congestion is encountered.  TCP could not   achieve the same results.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 156]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003ANNEX E - Basic packages   This annex contains definitions of some packages for use with   Recommendation H.248.1.E.1   Generic   PackageID: g (0x0001)   Version: 1   Extends: None   Description:      Generic package for commonly encountered items.E.1.1 Properties   None.E.1.2 Events   Cause      EventID: cause (0x0001)      Generic error event      EventsDescriptor parameters:  None      ObservedEvents Descriptor Parameters:         General Cause         ParameterID: Generalcause (0x0001)            This parameter groups the failures into six groups, which            the MGC may act upon.            Type: enumeration            Possible values:                     "NR" Normal Release (0x0001)                     "UR" Unavailable Resources (0x0002)                     "FT" Failure, Temporary (0x0003)                     "FP" Failure, Permanent (0x0004)                     "IW" Interworking Error (0x0005)                     "UN" Unsupported (0x0006)         Failure Cause         ParameterID: Failurecause (0x0002)Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 157]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003            Possible values:  OCTET STRING            Description: The Failure Cause is the value generated by the            Released equipment, i.e., a released network connection.            The concerned value is defined in the appropriate bearer            control protocol.   Signal Completion      EventID: sc (0x0002)      Indicates the termination of a signal for which the      notifyCompletion parameter was set to enable reporting of a      completion event.  For further procedural description, see 7.1.1,      7.1.17 and 7.2.7.      EventsDescriptor parameters:  None      ObservedEvents Descriptor parameters:         Signal Identity         ParameterID: SigID (0x0001)            This parameter identifies the signal which has terminated.            For a signal that is contained in a signal list, the signal            list identity parameter should also be returned indicating            the appropriate list.            Type: Binary: octet (string), Text: string            Possible values: a signal which has terminated.  A signal            shall be identified using the pkgdName syntax without            wildcarding.         Termination Method         ParameterID: Meth (0x0002)            Indicates the means by which the signal terminated.            Type: enumeration            Possible values:               "TO" (0x0001) Signal timed out or otherwise completed on               its own               "EV" (0x0002) Interrupted by event               "SD" (0x0003) Halted by new Signals descriptor               "NC" (0x0004) Not completed, other causeGroves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 158]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003         Signal List ID         ParameterID:  SLID (0x0003)            Indicates to which signal list a signal belongs.  The            SignalList ID is only returned in cases where the signal            resides in a signal list.            Type: integer            Possible values: any integerE.1.3 Signals   None.E.1.4 Statistics   None.E.2   Base Root Package   PackageID: root (0x0002)   Version: 1   Extends: None   Description:      This package defines Gateway wide properties.E.2.1 Properties   MaxNrOfContexts   PropertyID: maxNumberOfContexts (0x0001)      The value of this property gives the maximum number of contexts      that can exist at any time.  The NULL context is not included in      this number.      Type: double      Possible values: 1 and up      Defined in: TerminationState      Characteristics: read only   MaxTerminationsPerContext   PropertyID: maxTerminationsPerContext (0x0002)Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 159]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003      The maximum number of allowed terminations in a context, see 6.1      Type: integer      Possible values: any integer      Defined in: TerminationState      Characteristics: read only   normalMGExecutionTime   PropertyId: normalMGExecutionTime (0x0003)      Settable by the MGC to indicate the interval within which the MGC      expects a response to any transaction from the MG (exclusive of      network delay)      Type: integer      Possible values: any integer, represents milliseconds      Defined in: TerminationState      Characteristics: read / write   normalMGCExecutionTime   PropertyId: normalMGCExecutionTime (0x0004)      Settable by the MGC to indicate the interval within which the MG      should expects a response to any transaction from the MGC      (exclusive of network delay)      Type: integer      Possible values: any integer, represents milliseconds      Defined in: TerminationState      Characteristics: read / write   MGProvisionalResponseTimerValue   PropertyId: MGProvisionalResponseTimerValue (0x0005)      Indicates the time within which the MGC should expect a Pending      Response from the MG if a Transaction cannot be completed.      Initially set to normalMGExecutionTime plus network delay, but may      be lowered.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 160]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003      Type: Integer      Possible Values: any integer, represents milliseconds      Defined in: TerminationState      Characteristics: read / write   MGCProvisionalResponseTimerValue   PropertyId: MGCProvisionalResponseTimerValue (0x0006)      Indicates the time within which the MG should expect a Pending      Response from the MGC if a Transaction cannot be completed.      Initially set to normalMGCExecutionTime plus network delay, but      may be lowered.      Type: Integer      Possible Values: any integer, represents milliseconds      Defined in: TerminationState      Characteristics: read / writeE.2.2 Events   None.E.2.3 Signals   None.E.2.4 Statistics   None.E.2.5 Procedures   None.E.3   Tone Generator Package   PackageID: tonegen (0x0003)   Version: 1   Extends: NoneGroves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 161]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   Description:      This package defines signals to generate audio tones.  This      package does not specify parameter values.  It is intended to be      extendable.  Generally, tones are defined as an individual signal      with a parameter, ind, representing "interdigit" time delay, and a      tone id to be used with playtones.  A tone id should be kept      consistent with any tone generation for the same tone.  MGs are      expected to be provisioned with the characteristics of appropriate      tones for the country in which the MG is located.   Designed to be extended only.E.3.1 Properties   None.E.3.2 Events   None.E.3.3 Signals   Play tone   SignalID: pt (0x0001)      Plays audio tone over an audio channel      Signal Type: Brief      Duration: Provisioned      Additional parameters:         Tone id list         ParameterID: tl (0x0001)            Type: list of tone ids            List of tones to be played in sequence.  The list SHALL            contain one or more tone ids.         Inter signal duration         ParameterID: ind (0x0002)            Type: integer            Timeout between two consecutive tones in millisecondsGroves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 162]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   No tone ids are specified in this package.  Packages that extend this   package can add possible values for tone id as well as adding   individual tone signals.E.3.4 Statistics   None.E.3.5 Procedures   None.E.4   Tone Detection Package   PackageID: tonedet (0x0004)   Version: 1   Extends: None   This Package defines events for audio tone detection.  Tones are   selected by name (tone id).  MGs are expected to be provisioned with   the characteristics of appropriate tones for the country in which the   MG is located.   Designed to be extended only:      This package does not specify parameter values.  It is intended to      be extendable.E.4.1 Properties   None.E.4.2 Events   Start tone detected   EventID: std, 0x0001      Detects the start of a tone.  The characteristics of positive tone      detection are implementation dependent.      EventsDescriptor parameters:         Tone id list         ParameterID: tl (0x0001)            Type: list of tone idsGroves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 163]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003            Possible values: The only tone id defined in this package is            "wild card" which is "*" in text encoding and 0x0000 in            binary.  Extensions to this package would add possible            values for tone id.  If tl is "wild card", any tone id is            detected.         ObservedEventsDescriptor parameters:         Tone id         ParameterID: tid (0x0003)            Type: enumeration            Possible values: "wildcard" as defined above is the only            value defined in this package.  Extensions to this package            would add additional possible values for tone id.         End tone detected         EventID: etd, 0x0002         Detects the end of a tone.         EventDescriptor parameters:            Tone id list            ParameterID: tl (0x0001)               Type: enumeration or list of enumerated types               Possible values: No possible values are specified in this               package.  Extensions to this package would add possible               values for tone id.         ObservedEventsDescriptor parameters:            Tone id            ParameterID: tid (0x0003)               Type: enumeration               Possible values: "wildcard" as defined above is the only               value defined in this package.  Extensions to this               package would add possible values for tone id.            Duration            ParameterId: dur (0x0002)               Type: integer, in millisecondsGroves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 164]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003               This parameter contains the duration of the tone from               first detection until it stopped.   Long tone detected   EventID: ltd, 0x0003      Detects that a tone has been playing for at least a certain amount      of time.      EventDescriptor parameters:         Tone id list         ParameterID: tl (0x0001)            Type: enumeration or list            Possible values: "wildcard" as defined above is the only            value defined in this package.  Extensions to this package            would add possible values for tone id.         Duration         ParameterID: dur (0x0002)            Type: integer, duration to test against            Possible values: any legal integer, expressed in            milliseconds      ObservedEventsDescriptor parameters:         Tone id         ParameterID: tid (0x0003)            Type: Enumeration            Possible values: No possible values are specified in this            package.  Extensions to this package would add possible            values for tone id.E.4.3 Signals   None.E.4.4 Statistics   None.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 165]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003E.4.5 Procedures   None.E.5   Basic DTMF Generator Package   PackageID: dg (0x0005)   Version: 1   Extends: tonegen version 1   This package defines the basic DTMF tones as signals and extends the   allowed values of parameter tl of playtone in tonegen.E.5.1 Properties   None.E.5.2 Events   None.E.5.3 Signals   DTMF character 0   SignalID: d0 (0x0010)      Generate DTMF 0 tone.  The physical characteristic of DTMF 0 is      defined in the gateway.      Signal Type: Brief      Duration: Provisioned      Additional parameters:         None.   Additional values:      d0 (0x0010) is defined as a tone id for playtone   The other DTMF characters are specified in exactly the same way.  A   table with all signal names and signal IDs is included.  Note that   each DTMF character is defined as both a signal and a tone id, thus   extending the basic tone generation package.  Also note that DTMF   SignalIds are different from the names used in a digit map.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 166]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003                     Signal name     Signal ID/Tone id                    DTMF character 0    d0 (0x0010)                    DTMF character 1    d1 (0x0011)                    DTMF character 2    d2 (0x0012)                    DTMF character 3    d3 (0x0013)                    DTMF character 4    d4 (0x0014)                    DTMF character 5    d5 (0x0015)                    DTMF character 6    d6 (0x0016)                    DTMF character 7    d7 (0x0017)                    DTMF character 8    d8 (0x0018)                    DTMF character 9    d9 (0x0019)                    DTMF character *    ds (0x0020)                    DTMF character #    do (0x0021)                    DTMF character A    da (0x001a)                    DTMF character B    db (0x001b)                    DTMF character C    dc (0x001c)                    DTMF character D    dd (0x001d)E.5.4 Statistics   None.E.5.5 Procedures   None.E.6   DTMF detection Package   PackageID: dd (0x0006)   Version: 1   Extends: tonedet version 1   This package defines the basic DTMF tones detection.  This Package   extends the possible values of tone id in the "start tone detected"   "end tone detected" and "long tone detected" events.   Additional tone id values are all tone ids described in package dg   (basic DTMF generator package).   The following table maps DTMF events to digit map symbols as   described in 7.1.14.                           DTMF Event Symbol                           d0   "0"                           d1   "1"                           d2   "2"Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 167]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003                           d3   "3"                           d4   "4"                           d5   "5"                           d6   "6"                           d7   "7"                           d8   "8"                           d9   "9"                           da   "A" or "a"                           db   "B" or "b"                           dc   "C" or "c"                           dd   "D" or "d"                           ds   "E" or "e"                           do   "F" or "f"E.6.1 Properties   None.E.6.2 Events   DTMF digits      EventIds are defined with the same names as the SignalIds defined      in the table found in E.5.3.   DigitMap Completion Event   EventID: ce, 0x0004      Generated when a digit map completes as described in 7.1.14.      EventsDescriptor parameters: None.      ObservedEventsDescriptor parameters:         DigitString         ParameterID: ds (0x0001)            Type: string of digit map symbols (possibly empty) returned            as a quotedString            Possible values: a sequence of the characters "0" through            "9", "A" through "F", and the long duration modifier "Z".            Description: the portion of the current dial string as            described in 7.1.14 which matched part or all of an            alternative event sequence specified in the digit map.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 168]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003         Termination Method         ParameterID: Meth (0x0003)            Type: enumeration            Possible values:               "UM" (0x0001) Unambiguous match               "PM" (0x0002) Partial match, completion by timer expiry               or unmatched event               "FM" (0x0003) Full match, completion by timer expiry or               unmatched event            Description: indicates the reason for generation of the            event.  See the procedures in 7.1.14.E.6.3 Signals   None.E.6.4 Statistics   None.E.6.5 Procedures   Digit map processing is activated only if an events descriptor is   activated that contains a digit map completion event as defined in   Section E.6.2 and that digit map completion event contains an eventDM   field in the requested actions as defined inSection 7.1.9.  Other   parameters such as KeepActive or embedded events of signals   descriptors may also be present in the events descriptor and do not   affect the activation of digit map processing.E.7   Call Progress Tones Generator Package   PackageID: cg, 0x0007   Version: 1   Extends: tonegen version 1   This package defines the basic call progress tones as signals and   extends the allowed values of the tl parameter of playtone in   tonegen.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 169]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003E.7.1 Properties   None.E.7.2 Events   None.E.7.3 Signals   Dial Tone   SignalID: dt (0x0030)      Generate dial tone.  The physical characteristic of dial tone is      available in the gateway.      Signal Type: TimeOut      Duration: Provisioned      Additional parameters:         None.   Additional values:      dt (0x0030) is defined as a tone id for playtone   The other tones of this package are defined in exactly the same way.   A table with all signal names and signal IDs is included.  Note that   each tone is defined as both a signal and a tone id, thus extending   the basic tone generation package.     Signal Name                 Signal ID/tone id     Dial Tone                   dt (0x0030)     Ringing Tone                rt (0x0031)     Busy Tone                   bt (0x0032)     Congestion Tone             ct (0x0033)     Special Information Tone    sit(0x0034)     Warning Tone                wt (0x0035)     Payphone Recognition Tone   prt (0x0036)     Call Waiting Tone           cw (0x0037)     Caller Waiting Tone         cr (0x0038)E.7.4 Statistics   None.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 170]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003E.7.5 Procedures      NOTE - The required set of tone ids corresponds to those defined      in Recommendation E.180/Q.35.  See Recommendation E.180/Q.35 for      definition of the meanings of these tones.E.8   Call Progress Tones Detection Package   PackageID: cd (0x0008)   Version: 1   Extends: tonedet version 1   This package defines the basic call progress detection tones.  This   package extends the possible values of tone id in the "start tone   detected", "end tone detected" and "long tone detected" events.   Additional values      toneID values are defined for start tone detected, end tone      detected and long tone detected with the same values as those in      package cg (call progress tones generation package).   The required set of tone ids corresponds to Recommendation   E.180/Q.35.  See Recommendation E.180/Q.35 for definition of the   meanings of these tones.E.8.1 Properties   None.E.8.2 Events   Events are defined as in the call progress tones generator package   (cg) for the tones listed in the table of E.7.3.E.8.3 Signals   None.E.8.4 Statistics   None.E.8.5 Procedures   None.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 171]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003E.9   Analog Line Supervision Package   PackageID: al, 0x0009   Version: 1   Extends: None   This package defines events and signals for an analog line.   E.9.1 Properties   None.E.9.2 Events   onhook   EventID: on (0x0004)      Detects handset going on hook.  Whenever an events descriptor is      activated that requests monitoring for an on-hook event and the      line is already on-hook, then the MG shall behave according to the      setting of the "strict" parameter.      EventDescriptor parameters:         Strict Transition         ParameterID: strict (0x0001)            Type: enumeration            Possible values: "exact" (0x00), "state" (0x01), "failWrong"            (0x02)              "exact" means that only an actual hook state transition to              on-hook is to be recognized;              "state" means that the event is to be recognized either if              the hook state transition is detected or if the hook state              is already on-hook;              "failWrong" means that if the hook state is already              on-hook, the command fails and an error is reported.      ObservedEventsDescriptor parameters:         Initial State         ParameterID: init (0x0002)            Type: BooleanGroves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 172]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003            Possible values:               "True" means that the event was reported because the line               was already on-hook when the events descriptor containing               this event was activated;               "False" means that the event represents an actual state               transition to on-hook.   offhook   EventID: of (0x0005)      Detects handset going off hook.  Whenever an events descriptor is      activated that requests monitoring for an off-hook event and the      line is already off-hook, then the MG shall behave according to      the setting of the "strict" parameter.      EventDescriptor parameters:         Strict Transition         ParameterID: strict (0x0001)            Type: enumeration            Possible values: "exact" (0x00), "state" (0x01), "failWrong"            (0x02)               "exact" means that only an actual hook state transition               to off-hook is to be recognized;               "state" means that the event is to be recognized either               if the hook state transition is detected or if the hook               state is already off-hook;               "failWrong" means that if the hook state is already off-               hook, the command fails and an error is reported.      ObservedEventsDescriptor parameters         Initial State         ParameterID: init (0x0002)            Type: BooleanGroves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 173]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003            Possible values:               "True" means that the event was reported because the line               was already off-hook when the events descriptor               containing this event was activated;               "False" means that the event represents an actual state               transition to off-hook.   flashhook   EventID: fl, 0x0006      Detects handset flash.  A flash occurs when an onhook is followed      by an offhook between a minimum and maximum duration.      EventDescriptor parameters:         Minimum duration         ParameterID: mindur (0x0004)            Type: integer in milliseconds            Default value is provisioned.         Maximum duration         ParameterID: maxdur (0x0005)            Type: integer in milliseconds            Default value is provisioned.      ObservedEventsDescriptor parameters:         NoneE.9.3 Signals   ring   SignalID: ri, 0x0002      Applies ringing on the line      Signal Type: TimeOut      Duration: ProvisionedGroves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 174]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003      Additional parameters:         Cadence         ParameterID: cad (0x0006)            Type: list of integers representing durations of alternating            on and off segments, constituting a complete ringing cycle            starting with an on.  Units in milliseconds            Default is fixed or provisioned.  Restricted function MGs            may ignore cadence values they are incapable of generating.         Frequency         ParameterID: freq (0x0007)            Type: integer in Hz            Default is fixed or provisioned.  Restricted function MGs            may ignore frequency values they are incapable of            generating.E.9.4 Statistics   None.E.9.5 Procedures   If the MGC sets an EventsDescriptor containing a hook state   transition event (on-hook or off-hook) with the "strict" (0x0001)   parameter set to "failWrong", and the hook state is already what the   transition implies, the execution of the command containing that   EventsDescriptor fails.  The MG SHALL include error code 540   "Unexpected initial hook state" in its reponse.E.9.6 Error code   This package defines a new error code:      540 - Unexpected initial hook state   The procedure for use of this code is given in E.9.5.E.10  Basic Continuity Package   PackageID: ct (0x000a)   Version: 1   Extends: NoneGroves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 175]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   This package defines events and signals for continuity test.  The   continuity test includes provision of either a loopback or   transceiver functionality.E.10.1   Properties   None.E.10.2   Events   Completion   EventID: cmp, 0x0005      This event detects test completion of continuity test.      EventDescriptor parameters         None.      ObservedEventsDescriptor parameters         Result         ParameterID: res (0x0008)            Type: enumeration            Possible values: success (0x0001), failure (0x0000)E.10.3   Signals   Continuity test   SignalID: ct (0x0003)      Initiates sending of continuity test tone on the termination to      which it is applied.      Signal Type: TimeOut      Default value is provisioned      Additional parameters:         None.   Respond   SignalID: rsp (0x0004)Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 176]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003      The signal is used to respond to a continuity test.  See E.10.5      for further explanation.      Signal Type: On/Off      Default duration is provisioned      Additional parameters:         None.E.10.4   Statistics   None.E.10.5   Procedures   When a MGC wants to initiate a continuity test, it sends a command to   the MG containing:   -  a signals descriptor with the ct signal; and   -  an events descriptor containing the cmp event.   Upon reception of a command containing the ct signal and cmp event,   the MG initiates the continuity test tone for the specified   Termination.  If the return tone is detected and any other required   conditions are satisfied before the signal times out, the cmp event   shall be generated with the value of the result parameter equal to   success.  In all other cases, the cmp event shall be generated with   the value of the result parameter equal to failure.   When a MGC wants the MG to respond to a continuity test, it sends a   command to the MG containing a signals descriptor with the rsp   signal.  Upon reception of a command with the rsp signal, the MG   either applies a loopback or (for 2-wire circuits) awaits reception   of a continuity test tone.  In the loopback case, any incoming   information shall be reflected back as outgoing information.  In the   2-wire case, any time the appropriate test tone is received, the   appropriate response tone should be sent.  The MGC determines when to   remove the rsp signal.   When a continuity test is performed on a Termination, no echo devices   or codecs shall be active on that Termination.   Performing voice path assurance as part of continuity testing is   provisioned by bilateral agreement between network operators.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 177]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003      (Informative Note) Example tones and test procedure details are      given in Q.724 sections7 and8, Q.764section 2.1.8 and Q.1902.4.E.11  Network Package   PackageID: nt (0x000b)   Version: 1   Extends: None   This package defines properties of network terminations independent   of network type.E.11.1   Properties   Maximum Jitter Buffer   PropertyID: jit (0x0007)      This property puts a maximum size on the jitter buffer.      Type: integer in milliseconds      Possible values: This property is specified in milliseconds.      Defined in: LocalControlDescriptor      Characteristics: read/writeE.11.2   Events   network failure   EventID: netfail, 0x0005      The termination generates this event upon detection of a failure      due to external or internal network reasons.      EventDescriptor parameters         None.      ObservedEventsDescriptor parameters         cause         ParameterID: cs (0x0001)            Type: string            Possible values: any text stringGroves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 178]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003            This parameter may be included with the failure event to            provide diagnostic information on the reason of failure.   quality alert   EventID: qualert, 0x0006      This property allows the MG to indicate a loss of quality of the      network connection.  The MG may do this by measuring packet loss,      interarrival jitter, propagation delay and then indicating this      using a percentage of quality loss.      EventDescriptor parameters         Threshold         ParameterId: th (0x0001)            Type: integer            Possible values: 0 to 99            Description: threshold for percent of quality loss measured,            calculated based on a provisioned method, that could take            into consideration packet loss, jitter, and delay for            example.  Event is triggered when calculation exceeds the            threshold.      ObservedEventsDescriptor parameters         Threshold         ParameterId: th (0x0001)            Type: integer            Possible values: 0 to 99            Description: percent of quality loss measured, calculated            based on a provisioned method, that could take into            consideration packet loss, jitter, and delay for example.E.11.3   Signals   None.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 179]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003E.11.4   Statistics   Duration   StatisticsID: dur (0x0001)      Description: provides duration of time the termination has been in      the Context.      Type: double, in milliseconds   Octets Sent   StatisticID: os (0x0002)      Type: double      Possible values: any 64-bit integer   Octets Received   StatisticID: or (0x0003)      Type: double      Possible values: any 64-bit integerE.11.5   Procedures   None.E.12  RTP Package   PackageID: rtp (0x000c)   Version: 1   Extends: Network Package version 1   This package is used to support packet-based multimedia data transfer   by means of the Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) [RFC 1889].E.12.1   Properties   None.E.12.2   Events   Payload Transition   EventID: pltrans, 0x0001      This event detects and notifies when there is a transition of the      RTP payload format from one format to another.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 180]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003      EventDescriptor parameters         None.      ObservedEventsDescriptor parameters         ParameterName: rtppayload         ParameterID: rtppltype, 0x01         Type: list of enumerated types.         Possible values: The encoding method shall be specified by         using one or several valid encoding names, as defined in the         RTP AV Profile or registered with IANA.E.12.3   Signals   None.E.12.4   Statistics   Packets Sent   StatisticID: ps (0x0004)      Type: double      Possible values: any 64-bit integer   Packets Received   StatisticID: pr (0x0005)      Type: double      Possible values: any 64-bit integer   Packet Loss   StatisticID: pl (0x0006)      Describes the current rate of packet loss on an RTP stream, as      defined in IETFRFC 1889.  Packet loss is expressed as percentage      value: number of packets lost in the interval between two      reception reports, divided by the number of packets expected      during that interval.      Type: double      Possible values: a 32-bit whole number and a 32-bit fraction.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 181]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   Jitter   StatisticID: jit (0x0007)      Requests the current value of the interarrival jitter on an RTP      stream as defined in IETFRFC 1889.  Jitter measures the variation      in interarrival time for RTP data packets.   Delay   StatisticID:delay (0x0008)      Requests the current value of packet propagation delay expressed      in timestamp units.  Same as average latency.E.12.5   Procedures   None.E.13  TDM Circuit Package      PackageID: tdmc (0x000d)      Version: 1      Extends: Network Package version 1      This package may be used by any termination that supports gain and      echo control.  It was originally intended for use on TDM circuits      but may be more widely used.      New versions or extensions of this package should take non-TDM use      into account.E.13.1   Properties      Echo Cancellation      PropertyID: ec (0x0008)         Type: boolean         Possible values:            "on" (when the echo cancellation is requested) and            "off" (when it is turned off.)            The default is provisioned.         Defined in: LocalControlDescriptorGroves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 182]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003         Characteristics: read/write      Gain Control      PropertyID: gain (0x000a)         Gain control, or usage of of signal level adaptation and         noise level reduction is used to adapt the level of the signal.         However, it is necessary, for example for modem calls, to turn         off this function.         Type: integer         Possible values:         The gain control parameter may either be specified as         "automatic" (0xffffffff), or as an explicit number of decibels         of gain (any other integer value).  The default is provisioned         in the MG.      Defined in: LocalControlDescriptor      Characteristics: read/writeE.13.2   Events   None.E.13.3   Signals   None.E.13.4   Statistics   None.E.13.5   Procedures   None.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 183]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003APPENDIX I  EXAMPLE CALL FLOWS (INFORMATIVE)   All H.248.1 implementors must read the normative part of this RFC   carefully before implementing from it.  The examples in this appendix   should not be used as stand-alone explanations of how to create   protocol messages.   The examples in this appendix use SDP for encoding of the Local and   and Remote stream descriptors. SDP is defined inRFC 2327. If there   is is any discrepancy between the SDP in the examples, andRFC 2327,   the the RFC should be consulted for correctness. Audio profiles used   are are those defined in IETFRFC 1890, and others registered with   IANA.  For example, G.711 A-law is called PCMA in SDP, and is   assigned profile 0. G.723.1 is called G723 and is profile 4; H.263 is   called H263 and is profile 34. See alsohttp://www.iana.org/assignments/rtp-parameters.A.1   Residential Gateway to Residential Gateway Call   This example scenario illustrates the use of the elements of the   protocol to set up a Residential Gateway to Residential Gateway call   over an IP-based network.  For simplicity, this example assumes that   both Residential Gateways involved in the call are controlled by the   same Media Gateway Controller.A.1.1 Programming Residential GW Analog Line Terminations for Idle   Behavior   The following illustrates the API invocations from the Media Gateway   Controller and Media Gateways to get the Terminations in this   scenario programmed for idle behavior.  Both the originating and   terminating Media Gateways have idle AnalogLine Terminations   programmed to look for call initiation events (i.e., -offhook) by   using the Modify Command with the appropriate parameters.  The null   Context is used to indicate that the Terminations are not yet   involved in a Context.  The ROOT termination is used to indicate the   entire MG instead of a termination within the MG.   In this example, MG1 has the IP address 124.124.124.222, MG2 is   125.125.125.111, and the MGC is 123.123.123.4. The default Megaco   port is 55555 for all three.   1. An MG registers with an MGC using the ServiceChange command:   MG1 to MGC:   MEGACO/1 [124.124.124.222] Transaction = 9998 {       Context = - {Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 184]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003           ServiceChange = ROOT {Services {               Method=Restart,               ServiceChangeAddress=55555, Profile=ResGW/1}           }       } }   2. The MGC sends a reply:   MGC to MG1:   MEGACO/1 [123.123.123.4]:55555 Reply = 9998 {      Context = - {ServiceChange = ROOT {        Services {ServiceChangeAddress=55555, Profile=ResGW/1} } } }   3. The MGC programs a Termination in the NULL context.  The   terminationId is A4444, the streamId is 1, the requestId in the   Events descriptor is 2222.  The mId is the identifier of the sender   of this message, in this case, it is the IP address and port   [123.123.123.4]:55555.  Mode for this stream is set to SendReceive.   "al" is the analog line supervision package.  Local and Remote are   assumed to be provisioned.   MGC to MG1:   MEGACO/1 [123.123.123.4]:55555 Transaction = 9999 {       Context = - {           Modify = A4444 {               Media { Stream = 1 {                        LocalControl {                            Mode = SendReceive,                            tdmc/gain=2,  ; in dB,                            tdmc/ec=on                        },                    }               },               Events = 2222 {al/of(strict=state)}           }       } }   The dialplan script could have been loaded into the MG previously.   Its function would be to wait for the OffHook, turn on dialtone and   start collecting DTMF digits.  However in this example, we use the   digit map, which is put into place after the offhook is detected   (step 5 below).Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 185]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   Note that the embedded EventsDescriptor could have been used to   combine steps 3 and 4 with steps 8 and 9, eliminating steps 6 and 7.   4. The MG1 accepts the Modify with this reply:   MG1 to MGC:   MEGACO/1 [124.124.124.222]:55555   Reply = 9999 {      Context = - {Modify = A4444} }   5. A similar exchange happens between MG2 and the MGC, resulting in   an idle Termination called A5555.A.1.2 Collecting Originator Digits and Initiating Termination   The following builds upon the previously shown conditions.  It   illustrates the transactions from the Media Gateway Controller and   originating Media Gateway (MG1) to get the originating Termination   (A4444) through the stages of digit collection required to initiate a   connection to the terminating Media Gateway (MG2).   6. MG1 detects an offhook event from User 1 and reports it to the   Media Gateway Controller via the Notify Command.   MG1 to MGC:   MEGACO/1 [124.124.124.222]:55555 Transaction = 10000 {      Context = - {          Notify = A4444 {ObservedEvents =2222 {            19990729T22000000:al/of(init=false)}}      } }   7. And the Notify is acknowledged.   MGC to MG1:   MEGACO/1 [123.123.123.4]:55555 Reply = 10000 {       Context = - {Notify = A4444} }Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 186]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   8. The MGC Modifies the termination to play dial tone, to look for   digits according to Dialplan0 and to look for the on-hook event now.   MGC to MG1:   MEGACO/1 [123.123.123.4]:55555 Transaction = 10001 {       Context = - {           Modify = A4444 {               Events = 2223 {                   al/on(strict=state), dd/ce {DigitMap=Dialplan0}               },               Signals {cg/dt},               DigitMap= Dialplan0{ (0| 00|[1-   7]xxx|8xxxxxxx|Fxxxxxxx|Exx|91xxxxxxxxxx|9011x.)}           }       } }   9. And the Modify is acknowledged.   MG1 to MGC:   MEGACO/1 [124.124.124.222]:55555 Reply = 10001 {       Context = - {Modify = A4444} }   10.   Next, digits are accumulated by MG1 as they are dialed by User   1.  Dialtone is stopped upon detection of the first digit.  When an   appropriate match is made of collected digits against the currently   programmed Dialplan for A4444, another Notify is sent to the Media   Gateway Controller.   MG1 to MGC:   MEGACO/1 [124.124.124.222]:55555 Transaction = 10002 {      Context = - {          Notify = A4444 {ObservedEvents =2223 {            19990729T22010001:dd/ce{ds="916135551212",Meth=UM}}}      } }   11.   And the Notify is acknowledged.   MGC to MG1:   MEGACO/1 [123.123.123.4]:55555 Reply = 10002 {       Context = - {Notify = A4444} }   12.   The controller then analyses the digits and determines that a   connection needs to be made from MG1 to MG2.  Both the TDMGroves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 187]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   termination A4444, and an RTP termination are added to a new context   in MG1.  Mode is ReceiveOnly since Remote descriptor values are not   yet specified.  Preferred codecs are in the MGC's preferred order of   choice.   MGC to MG1:   MEGACO/1 [123.123.123.4]:55555 Transaction = 10003 {       Context = $ {          Add = A4444,          Add = $ {              Media {                Stream = 1 {                     LocalControl {                         Mode = ReceiveOnly,                         nt/jit=40 ; in ms                     },                     Local { v=0 c=IN IP4 $ m=audio $ RTP/AVP 4   a=ptime:30 v=0 c=IN IP4 $ m=audio $ RTP/AVP 0                     }                }             }          }       } }      NOTE - The MGC states its preferred parameter values as a series      of SDP blocks in  Local.  The MG fills in the Local Descriptor in      the Reply.   13.   MG1 acknowledges the new Termination and fills in the Local IP   address and UDP port.  It also makes a choice for the codec based on   the MGC preferences in Local.  MG1 sets the RTP port to 2222.   MG1 -> MGC:   MEGACO/1 [124.124.124.222]:55555 Reply = 10003 {      Context = 2000 {         Add = A4444,         Add=A4445{            Media {                Stream = 1 {                    Local { v=0 o=- 2890844526 2890842807 IN IP4   124.124.124.222 s=- t= 0 0 c=IN IP4 124.124.124.222 m=audio 2222   RTP/AVP 4 a=ptime:30 a=recvonly                    } ; RTP profile for G.723.1 is 4                }Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 188]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003            }         }      } }   14.   The MGC will now associate A5555 with a new Context on MG2, and   establish an RTP Stream (i.e., A5556 will be assigned), SendReceive   connection through to the originating user, User 1.  The MGC also   sets ring on A5555.   MGC to MG2:   MEGACO/1 [123.123.123.4]:55555 Transaction = 50003 {       Context = $ {          Add = A5555  { Media {               Stream = 1 {                    LocalControl {Mode = SendReceive} }},         Events=1234{al/of(strict=state)},               Signals {al/ri}               },          Add  = $ {Media {               Stream = 1 {                    LocalControl {                       Mode = SendReceive,                       nt/jit=40 ; in ms                    },                    Local { v=0 c=IN IP4 $ m=audio $ RTP/AVP 4   a=ptime:30                    },                    Remote { v=0 c=IN IP4 124.124.124.222 m=audio 2222   RTP/AVP 4 a=ptime:30                    } ; RTP profile for G.723.1 is 4                }             }         }      } }   15.   This is acknowledged.  The stream port number is different from   the control port number.  In this case it is 1111 (in the SDP).   MG2 to MGC:   MEGACO/1 [125.125.125.111]:55555 Reply = 50003 {      Context = 5000 {      Add = A5555,         Add = A5556{            Media {               Stream = 1 {Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 189]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003                   Local { v=0 o=- 7736844526 7736842807 IN IP4   125.125.125.111 s=- t= 0 0 c=IN IP4 125.125.125.111 m=audio 1111   RTP/AVP 4 }               } ; RTP profile for G723.1 is 4            }          }      } }   16.   The above IPAddr and UDPport need to be given to MG1 now.   MGC to MG1:   MEGACO/1 [123.123.123.4]:55555 Transaction = 10005 {     Context = 2000 {       Modify = A4444 {         Signals {cg/rt}       },       Modify = A4445 {          Media {               Stream = 1 {                   Remote { v=0 o=- 7736844526 7736842807 IN IP4   125.125.125.111 s=- t= 0 0 c=IN IP4 125.125.125.111 m=audio 1111   RTP/AVP 4                   }               } ; RTP profile for G723.1 is 4           }       }     } }   MG1 to MGC:   MEGACO/1 [124.124.124.222]:55555 Reply = 10005 {      Context = 2000 {Modify = A4444, Modify = A4445} }   17.   The two gateways are now connected and User 1 hears the   RingBack.  The MG2 now waits until User2 picks up the receiver and   then the two-way call is established.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 190]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   From MG2 to MGC:   MEGACO/1 [125.125.125.111]:55555 Transaction = 50005 {      Context = 5000 {          Notify = A5555 {ObservedEvents =1234 {            19990729T22020002:al/of(init=false)}}      } }   From MGC to MG2:   MEGACO/1 [123.123.123.4]:55555 Reply = 50005 {       Context = - {Notify = A5555} }   From MGC to MG2:   MEGACO/1 [123.123.123.4]:55555 Transaction = 50006 {      Context = 5000 {         Modify = A5555 {            Events = 1235 {al/on(strict=state)},            Signals { } ; to turn off ringing         }      } }   From MG2 to MGC:   MEGACO/1 [125.125.125.111]:55555 Reply = 50006 {    Context = 5000 {Modify = A4445} }   18.   Change mode on MG1 to SendReceive, and stop the ringback.   MGC to MG1:   MEGACO/1 [123.123.123.4]:55555 Transaction = 10006 {      Context = 2000 {         Modify = A4445 {            Media {               Stream = 1 {                  LocalControl {                     Mode=SendReceive                  }               }            }         },         Modify = A4444 {            Signals { }         }Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 191]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003      } }   from MG1 to MGC:   MEGACO/1 [124.124.124.222]:55555 Reply = 10006 {      Context = 2000 {Modify = A4445, Modify = A4444}}   19.   The MGC decides to Audit the RTP termination on MG2.   MGC -> MG2:   MEGACO/1 [123.123.123.4]:55555 Transaction = 50007 {      Context = - {AuditValue = A5556{         Audit{Media, DigitMap, Events, Signals, Packages, Statistics }}      } }   20.   The MG2 replies.   MG2 -> MGC:   MEGACO/1 [125.125.125.111]:55555 Reply = 50007 {      Context = - { AuditValue = A5556 {             Media {                TerminationState { ServiceStates = InService,            Buffer = OFF },          Stream = 1 {                    LocalControl { Mode = SendReceive,                       nt/jit=40 },                    Local { v=0 o=- 7736844526 7736842807 IN IP4   125.125.125.111 s=- t= 0 0 c=IN IP4 125.125.125.111 m=audio 1111   RTP/AVP  4 a=ptime:30                   },                    Remote { v=0 o=- 2890844526 2890842807 IN IP4   124.124.124.222 s=- t= 0 0 c=IN IP4 124.124.124.222 m=audio 2222   RTP/AVP  4 a=ptime:30                    } } },              Events,           Signals,           DigitMap,          Packages {nt-1, rtp-1},             Statistics { rtp/ps=1200,  ; packets sent                          nt/os=62300, ; octets sent                          rtp/pr=700, ; packets received                          nt/or=45100, ; octets received                          rtp/pl=0.2,  ; % packet loss                          rtp/jit=20,                          rtp/delay=40 } ; avg latency          }Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 192]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003       } }   21.   When the MGC receives an onhook signal from one of the MGs, it   brings down the call.  In this example, the user at MG2 hangs up   first.   From MG2 to MGC:   MEGACO/1 [125.125.125.111]:55555 Transaction = 50008 {      Context = 5000 {          Notify = A5555 {ObservedEvents =1235 {             19990729T24020002:al/on(init=false)}          }      } }   From MGC to MG2:   MEGACO/1 [123.123.123.4]:55555 Reply = 50008 {       Context = - {Notify = A5555} }   22.   The MGC now sends both MGs a Subtract to take down the call.   Only the subtracts to MG2 are shown here.  Each termination has its   own set of statistics that it gathers.  An MGC may not need to   request both to be returned.  A5555 is a physical termination, and   A5556 is an RTP termination.   From MGC to MG2:   MEGACO/1 [123.123.123.4]:55555 Transaction = 50009 {      Context = 5000 {         Subtract = A5555 {Audit{Statistics}},         Subtract = A5556 {Audit{Statistics}}      } }   From MG2 to MGC:   MEGACO/1 [125.125.125.111]:55555 Reply = 50009 {      Context = 5000 {        Subtract = A5555 {             Statistics {                nt/os=45123, ; Octets Sent                nt/dur=40 ; in seconds                }          },          Subtract = A5556 {             Statistics {                rtp/ps=1245, ; packets sentGroves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 193]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003                nt/os=62345, ; octets sent                rtp/pr=780, ; packets received                nt/or=45123, ; octets received                rtp/pl=10, ;  % packets lost                rtp/jit=27,                rtp/delay=48 ; average latency             }          }      } }   23.   The MGC now sets up both MG1 and MG2 to be ready to detect the   next off-hook event.  See step 1.  Note that this could be the   default state of a termination in the null context, and if this were   the case, no message need be sent from the MGC to the MG.  Once a   termination returns to the null context, it goes back to the default   termination values for that termination.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 194]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003APPENDIX II  Changes FromRFC 3015   In the following table, "source" indicates when the change was first   approved.  It has the following values:   IG1100: H.248 Implementor's Guide approved in November, 2000 (as TD   Plen-39, Christian Groves, editor).   IG0601: H.248 Implementor's Guide approved in June, 2001 (as  TD   Plen-15, Christian Groves, editor).   IGDUB: Draft H.248 Implementor's Guide approved at the Q.3   Rapporteur's meeting held near Dublin, October 2001 (as TD-28, Terry   Anderson, editor).   GEN0202: added at the Geneva meeting, February 2002, which consented   to H.248 v1 Amendment 1 (as TD Plen-36r1, Marcello Pantaleo, editor).   ITUPOST: added in post-Geneva editing by the ITU-T.   TTPOST: added in post-approval editing by the Megaco Chair, Tom   Taylor, who assembled this document for submission.   Section    Source                       Change   1          ITUPOST   Reference changed from H.248 to H.248.1.   2.1        ITUPOST   Reference added for error codes, changed from                        H.248 Annex L to H.248.8 (2002).   2.1        IG1100    Corrected Q.765 reference to Q.765.5.   2.1        GEN0202   Added reference to X.690.   2.2        GEN0202   Added reference to H.226.   2.2         IGDUB    Added informative references to Q.724, Q.764,                        and Q.1902.4.   4          IG0601    Added expansion of ALF.   5          TTPOST    Gave priority to IETF conventions (added at                        start of document).Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 195]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   6.1.1      IG0601    Added text regarding use of wildcards for                        context identifiers.  (This information                        already appeared insection 8.1.2.  The IG                        change subsequently disappeared.)   6.1.1      IG1100    Added ranking of priority values.   6.2         IGDUB    Deleted definition of signals.   6.2        GEN0202   Expanded text and diagrams describing                        multiplexing terminations.   6.2        TTPOST    Added asterisks to multiplexing diagrams to                        indicate centre of context.  Added Figure 6a                        showing cascading of multiplexes.   6.2.2      IG0601    Added text indicating that ALL does not                        include ROOT.   6.2.3      IG1100    Added text clarifying what must be supported                        to claim support of a package.   6.2.3      IG1100    Added text indicating what packages a peer can                        indicate support for, when some of them are                        extensions of others.   6.2.4      IG0601    Added text on ability of provisioning to                        override default values, and need for MGC to                        audit to learn the provisioned defaults.   6.2.4      IG0601    Added text indicating effect of omitting                        specific properties from Descriptors in                        commands modifying a termination.                        Contradicted original text saying that omitted                        properties retain their prior values (still                        true for entirely-omitted Descriptors).   6.2.4      GEN0202   Modified above text to restrict it to                        read/write properties, allow for default                        behaviour in place of default values if so                        specified in the property definition.   6.2.4       IGDUB    Trimmed definition of signals Descriptor in                        table and inserted cross-reference tosection7.1.11.   6.2.4      IG1100    Added Topology and Error Descriptors to table.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 196]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   6.2.5       IGDUB    Specified error code to return if ROOT used                        inappropriately.   7.1.1      IG1100    Added qualification to explanation of effect                        of missing Audit Descriptor, excepting                        Subtract.   7.1.3      GEN0202   Changed "inputs" to "bearers" to be consistent                        with terminology in 6.2.   7.1.4      IG0601    Small change to make clear that more than one                        of Local, Remote, and LocalControl can be                        included in the default streamId.   7.1.7      IG0601    Default value for Mode specified to be                        Inactive.   7.1.7      GEN0202   Added text requiring processing of media in                        any of the reserved formats, where more than                        one has been reserved in a given stream.   7.1.8       IGDUB    Added restriction to at most one m= line per                        session description.   7.1.9      IG0601    Text added to omit request identifier if the                        EventsDescriptor is empty.  Further text added                        at end to indicate the effects of an empty                        EventsDescriptor and an empty                        EventBufferDescriptor.   7.1.9      IG0601    Fixed typo for destination of a Notify.   7.1.9      IG1100    Added note to say event remains active after                        it has been notified, so long as it is still                        present in the active Events Descriptor.   7.1.11      IGDUB    Added definition of signals.   7.1.11     GEN0202   Modified definition to include example of more                        complex signal, and added role of signal in                        media preparation for future signals.   7.1.11      IGDUB    The timeout completion reason was broadened to                        include other circumstances where the signal                        completed on its own.  Text added to indicate                        that if default signal type changed to TO,                        duration parameter must be provided.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 197]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   7.1.11     GEN0202   Removed reference to BR signal being "so                        short" it will stop on its own.  Added text                        indicating that if the type of a signal is                        changed to TO, the Duration parameter must be                        supplied.   7.1.11     IG1100    Deleted text discussing type of Signals List.   7.1.12     GEN0202   Improved wording of introductory paragraph and                        added text making content of returned                        Descriptor clear.   7.1.14.2   GEN0202   Added text indicating that when the start                        timer is set to 0, initial digit timing is                        disabled and the MG waits indefinitely for                        digits.   7.1.14.2   GEN0202   Added text pointing out that default digit                        timer values should be provisioned, but can be                        overridden in the digit map.   7.1.14.3   GEN0202   Changed result of long-short digit timer                        conflict from undefined to long.   7.1.14.6   IG1100    Clarified that the digit map is provided by                        the eventDM parameter, which must be present.   7.1.14.7   GEN0202   Added text clarifying that events covered by                        the digit map completion event have no side-                        effects unless separately enabled.   7.1.14.8   IG0601    Added requirement that the event specification                        include the eventDM parameter.   7.1.17      IGDUB    Added text to indicate timestamp is optional                        and to include observed event parameters in                        reported content.   7.1.17     GEN0202   Deleted provision that time is expressed in                        UTC (since intention was to use format, not                        time zone).   7.1.18      IGDUB    Added text indicating error to return if                        topology option not supported.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 198]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   7.1.18     IG1100    Added text clarifying effect of not mentioning              TTPOST    a termination in a topology Descriptor, and                        default topology for a new termination.  (This                        text got lost between the Dublin meeting and                        the production of H.248 Amendment 1 out of the                        Geneva 02/02 meeting.  It has been added back                        to the present document.)   7.1.19     IG1100    New section to describe Error Descriptor.              GEN0202   Slightly edited in Geneva 02/02 meeting.              ITUPOST   Reference for error code documentation updated                        to H.248.8.   7.1.19     IG0601    Added paragraph giving guidance on level at                        which errors should be reported.   7.2        IG1100    Noted possibility of Error Descriptor in reply                        to any command.   7.2.1      IG1100    Added EventBufferDescriptor as Add parameter.   7.2.1      IG1100    Removed restriction on use of CHOOSE wildcard.   7.2.2      IG1100    Added EventBufferDescriptor as Modify                        parameter.   7.2.2      GEN0202   Added text on side-effects of Modify of a                        multiplexing termination.   7.2.3      IG1100    Added prohibition against subtracting from the                        NULL context.   7.2.3      GEN0202   Added text on side-effects of Subtract of a                        multiplexing termination.   7.2.3       IGDUB    Added text clarifying effect of empty                        AuditDescriptor in Subtract.   7.2.4      IG1100    Added EventBufferDescriptor as Move parameter.   7.2.4      GEN0202   Removed misleading statement that Move acts as                        subtract from original context.   7.2.4      IG1100    Clarified effect of Move on properties of the                        moved termination.   7.2.4      GEN0202   Added text on side-effects of Move of a                        multiplexing termination.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 199]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   7.2.5      IG1100    Added examples showing W- wildcard usage.   7.2.5      IG1100    Noted that returning a list of all contextIDs                        requires that they be returned one per                        ActionReply.   7.2.5      IG1100    Added table entry (ALL, specific) to determine                        context in which termination currently                        resides.   7.2.6      GEN0202   Added table similar to that in 7.2.5.   7.2.7      IG0601    Added TerminationID to API.   7.2.7       IGDUB    Indicated timestamp was optional in Notify, to                        accord with syntax.   7.2.7      IG1100    Noted possibility of sending Error Descriptor                        in Notify.   7.2.8      IG0601    Added text to description of Forced method to                        indicate that Forced on ROOT indicates a cold                        restart (all context state lost).   7.2.8       IGDUB    Amplified explanation of Disconnected method                        to emphasize return to the previously                        controlling MGC.   7.2.8      IG0601    Added text for MG use of Failover method when                        it detects MGC failure.   7.2.8      IG1100    Added notes discouraging use of                        ServiceChangeAddress and warning that it could                        be either a full address or just a port                        number.   7.2.8      IG0601    Added text indicating that timestamp does not                        necessarily represent absolute time, only                        local clock reading.   7.2.8       IGDUB    Corrected "gateway" to "MGC" in discussion of                        returned ServiceChangeMgcId parameter.   7.3        IG0601    Removed error code documentation to Annex L              ITUPOST   (now H.248.8).   8          IG1100    Added requirement that an Action be non-empty.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 200]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   8          GEN0202   Added context properties and context property                        audit requests to commands as potential                        contents of actions.   8.1.2      GEN0202   Added prohibition on using partial contextIDs                        with ALL wildcards.   8.2.2      IG1100    Added text clarifying when in transaction                        processing the requested actions have been                        completed and a reply can be sent.   8.2.2      IG1100    Added ALL as allowed contextID in                        TransactionReply.   8.2.2      GEN0202   Provided general reference tosection 7.1.19                        for generation of error Descriptors.   8.2.2      IG0601    Corrected Actions to Commands when discussing                        partially-understood action.   8.3        IG0601    Added text specifying that the same MId value                        must be used by a given entity throughout the                        life of a control association.   8.3        IG0601    Added text expanding on independence of                        transactions from messages.   9          ITUPOST   Indicated that additional transports may be                        defined in separate Recommendations as well as                        annexes to the primary specification.   9          IG0601    Gave specific example of "request source                        address" for IP.   9.1        IG1100    Deleted restriction to one outstanding Notify                        command on a termination at one time, since                        this is transport-specific.   9.1        IG0601    Restored restriction, but noted that it                        applied only to transport not guaranteeing                        ordered delivery.   10.2       IG1100    Corrected length of synthesized address field                        from 10 to 20 hex digits and indicated that                        calculation should be over entire message, not                        just one transaction.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 201]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   11.2       IG1100    Corrected text in first two paragraphs                        describing use of ServiceChangeMgcId                        parameter.   11.2       IG1100    Corrected "Transaction Accept" to "Transaction                        Reply".   11.4       IG0601    Noted that support of redundant MGs requires              GEN0202   use of a reliable transport and support in the                        MGC.  Added more explanation in Geneva.   11.5       IG0601    Added text clarifying procedure if MG unable                        to establish a control relationship with any                        of its eligible MGCs.   11.5        IGDUB    Added text indicating that when trying to                        reestablish contact with the previously                        controlling MGC the MG uses the Disconnected                        method.   11.5       IG1100    Clarified handoff procedure.   11.5       GEN0202   Changed text on replies to transactions in                        progress during handoff.  Replies now                        discarded when the service relationship with                        the old MGC has ended, rather than sent to the                        new MGC.  The new MGC could still send replies                        to requests sent to the old MGC.   12.1.1     GEN0202   Added optional package designation as                        "designed to be extended only".   12.1.1     IG1100    Made prohibition on overloading of identifiers                        in extended packages transitive through all                        ancestors of the extended package.   12.1.2      IGDUB    Clarified the set of types allowed for                        properties.   12.1.2     GEN0202   Added requirement to specify the base type of                        a sub-list.   12.1.2     GEN0202   Provided requirements for content of the                        "Possible Values" template item, including                        specification of default values or behaviour.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 202]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   12.1.4     GEN0202   Added requirement to specify the default                        signal type, and specify a default duration                        for TO signals.  Also noted that duration is                        meaningless for BR, and that the signal type                        might be dependent on the values of other                        signal parameters.   12.2       GEN0202   Fixed section title (covers only event and                        signal parameters, not properties or                        statistics).   12.2       IG1100    Reserved SPA and EPA prefixes, so they are not                        to be used for signal and event parameter                        tokens.   12.2       IG0601    Expanded list of reserved prefixes.   12.2        IGDUB    Clarified the set of types allowed for signal                        and event parameters.   12.2       GEN0202   Added requirement to specify the base type of                        a sub-list.   12.2       GEN0202   Provided requirements for content of the                        "Possible Values" template item, including                        specification of default values or behaviour.   12.4        IGDUB    Corrected to indicate identifiers must start                        with alphabetic rather than alphanumeric                        character.   13.1       IG0601    Changed private range of binary package                        identifiers to convenient hex values.   A          GEN0202   Removed versions from X.680 and X.690                        references.   A.2         IGDUB    Added note warning that the syntax alone does                        not provide a complete description of the                        constraints, but must be supplemented by a                        reading of the text and comments.   A.2        IG0601    Added description of double wrapping of                        parameters declared as OCTET STRING.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 203]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   A.2        GEN0202   Some editing of double wrapping description to                        use ASN.1, BER in their proper places.  Added                        possibility of encoding strings as UTF8String,                        but only if they contain non-ASCII characters.   A.2         IGDUB    Added line in table on double wrapping of true                        octet strings.   A.2        IG1100    Corrected and expanded comments describing                        mtpAddress form of MId.  Fixed maximum length                        of mtpAddress both here and in                        ServiceChangeAddress.   A.2        IG0601   Inserted missing lines in IP4Address                        production.   A.2        IG0601    Modified TransactionResponseAck to allow                        acknowledgement of multiple ranges of                        transactionIds.   A.2        IG0601    Corrected numerical value of CHOOSE as a                        context identifier.   A.2         IGDUB    Added missing extension marker in                        TopologyRequest.   A.2        IG1100    AuditReply and AuditResult modified to bring                        binary functionality into line with text                        functionality.   A.2        IG0601    Removed OPTIONAL tag from terminationID in                        NotifyReply.   A.2        IG0601    Added extraInfo substructure to EventParameter                        and SigParameter.   A.2        IG0601    Modified MediaDescriptor to make it optional                        to specify a stream.   A.2        IG0601    Added OPTIONAL tags to reserveValue and                        reserveGroup.   A.2         IGDUB    Added to comments for pkgdName to indicate                        applicability to event names, signal names,                        and statisticIds as well as property.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 204]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   A.2        IG0601    RequestID made optional in EventsDescriptor                        and SecondEventsDescriptor and comment added                        saying it must be present if events are                        present.   A.2        IG1100    Added OPTIONAL tags on RequestActions and                        SecondRequestedActions keepActive BOOLEANs.   A.2        IG1100    Added comment to indicate requestID value to                        use in an AuditCapReply.   A.2        GEN0202   Added comment to DigitMapValue indicating time                        units for timers.   A.2        IG0601    Added comment indicating coding of Value for              GEN0202   ServiceChangeReason.  Cleaned up in Geneva to                        use ASN.1 and BER in their proper places.   A.2        IG0601    Inserted missing extension marker in                        ServiceChangeParm production.   A.2        IG0601    Aligned definition of mtpAddress in                        ServiceChangeAddress with that in MId.   A.2        IG0601    Added timestamp to ServiceChangeResParm.   A.2         IGDUB    Changed type of profileName in                        ServiceChangeProfile to IA5String.   A.2        IG0601    Made returned value optional in                        statisticsParameter, to support                        auditCapability result.   A.2        GEN0202   Added reference to ISO 8601:1988 for                        TimeNotation.   A.2        IG1100    Value production modified to support the                        sublist parameter type.   A.3        IG1100    Corrected ABNF for digitStringlisT, replacing                        "/" with "|".   A.3        IG1100    Added parentheses to digitMapRange production.   A.3        IG1100    Replaced more abbreviated syntax for pathName                        with fuller definition and constraints copied                        from B.2.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 205]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   B.2         IGDUB    Added note warning that the syntax alone does                        not provide a complete description of the                        constraints, but must be supplemented by a                        reading of the text and comments.   B.2        IG0601    Added note warning that the interpretation of                        symbols is context-dependent.   B.2        IG1100    Added comment to indicate case insensitivity                        of protocol (excepting SDP) and ABNF.   B.2        IG0601    Expanded upon and capitalized this comment.   B.2        IG0601    Lengthy note added on the coding of the VALUE                        construct.   B.2         IGDUB    Deleted sentence in note suggesting that                        packages could add new types for properties,                        parameters, or statistics.   B.2        IG0601    Added note indicating that parsers should                        allow for white space preceding the first line                        of SDP in Local or Remote.   B.2         IGDUB    Added comments identifying the O- and W- tags.   B.2        IG1100    Moved wildcard tag up from individual commands                        to commandRequestList.   B.2        GEN0202   Added additional error case to actionReply.   B.2        IG0601    Modified syntax of auditOther to allow return                        of terminationID only.   B.2         IGDUB    Corrected upper limit for V4hex.   B.2        IG1100    Corrected and expanded comments describing                        mtpAddress form of MId.   B.2        IG0601    Modified comment to mediaParm to make                        streamParms and StreamDescriptor mutually                        exclusive.   B.2        GEN0202   Modified comment further to indicate at most                        one instance of terminationStateDescriptor.   B.2        GEN0202   Expanded comment for streamParm to indicate                        the restriction on repetition is per item.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 206]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   B.2        IG0601    Modified "at most once" comments to localParm,                        terminationStateParm, and modemType, to allow                        multiple instances of propertyParm in the                        first two cases and extensionParameter in the                        last one.   B.2        IG0601    Added note before description of Local and                        Remote, pointing out that the octet value x00                        is not allowed in octetString.   B.2        IG0601    Syntax for eventsDescriptor, embedFirst, and                        eventBufferDescriptor modified to make                        contents beyond token optional.   B.2         IGDUB    Replaced "event" by "item" in comment to                        pkgdName because pkgdName applies to                        properties, signals, and statistics as well.   B.2        IG0601    Corrected placement of EQUAL in eventDM                        production.   B.2        IG1100    Added comment and syntax to indicate requestID                        value to use in an AuditCapReply.   B.2        IG1100    Corrected Modem Descriptor to allow package                        items as properties.   B.2        IG0601    Comment to modemType changed to allow multiple                        instances of extensionParameter.   B.2        GEN0202   Comment added to indicate units for Timer.   B.2        IG1100    Added parentheses to digitMapRange production.   B.2        IG1100    Added comment to serviceChangeParm,                        restricting each parameter to one appearance.   B.2        IG0601    Added comments making serviceChangeMgcId and                        serviceChangeAddress mutually exclusive in                        ServiceChangeParm and servChgReplyParm.   B.2         IGDUB    Added comment to serviceChangeParm indicating                        that ServiceChangeMethod and                        ServiceChangeReason are required.   B.2        IG0601    Added Timestamp to servChgReplyParm.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 207]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   B.2        IG0601    Added comment indicating coding of Value for                        ServiceChangeReason.   B.2        IG0601    Modified ServiceChangeAddress to use MId                        definition for full address.   B.2        IG1100    Made returned value optional in                        statisticsParameter, to support                        auditCapability result.   B.2        IG1100    Changed topologyDescriptor to allow multiple                        triples.   B.2        IG0601    Added comment forbidding use of a double quote                        within a quotedString value.   B.2        IG1100    Reserved prefixes for new tokens added to                        signalParameter and eventParameter, to avoid                        collision with package names.   B.2        IG1100    EmbedToken and EmergencyToken changed to                        remove clash with EventBufferToken.   B.3        IG1100    New section describing hexadecimal octet                        encoding.   B.4        IG1100    New section describing hex octet sequence.   C          IG1100    Added permission to use Annex C properties in                        LocalControl as well as in Local and Remote.   C          IG0601    Added text making support of all properties of                        Annex C optional.   C           IGDUB    Added directions to reconcile tabulated                        formats with allowed types for properties.   C.1        IG1100    Corrected Q.765 reference to Q.765.5 for                        ACodec.   C.1        IG1100    Deprecated Echocanc codepoint in favour of                        package-defined property.   C.4        ITUPOST   Updated references from Q.2961 to Q.2961.1.   C.4         IGDUB    Added details on format of VPVC.   C.9        IG1100    Renamed USI to layer1prot.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 208]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   C.9        IG1100    Deprecated ECHOCI codepoint in favour of                        package-defined property.   C.9        IG1100    Added new USI property.   C.11       IG1100    Added m= line tag.   D.1        IG0601    Added explanation of ALF.   D.1.5       IGDUB    Expanded text indicating that when trying to                        reestablish contact with the previously                        controlling MGC the MG uses the Disconnected                        method.   E.1.2      GEN0202   Added missing EventsDescriptor parameters                        lines.   E.1.2      GEN0202   For the Signal Completion event:                        - corrected the description of how it is                        enabled                        - heavily edited the description of the Signal                        Identity observed event parameter and added a                        type.   E.1.2       IGDUB    The timeout completion reason for the Signal                        Completion event was broadened to include                        other circumstances where the signal completed                        on its own.   E.1.2      IG1100    Added signal list ID observed event parameter                        to the Signal Completion event.   E.2.1      IG0601    Added missing read only, read-write                        specifications.   E.2.1      IG0601    Split ProvisionalResponseTimer properties into                        one for MG, one for MGC.   E.3        GEN0202   Added "Designed to be extended only" to                        tonegen package description.   E.4        GEN0202   Added "Designed to be extended only" to                        tonedet package description.   E.4.2      GEN0202   Added type for tone ID observed parameter for                        Long Tone Detected event.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 209]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   E.6.2      IG1100    Corrected binary identifier for digit map                        completion event to avoid clash with base                        package.   E.6.2      IG1100    Removed procedural text.   E.6.5      IG1100    Added procedural text indicating where to find                        the applicable digit map and indicating the                        error to return if the parameter is missing.   E.6.5      IG0601    Further modified procedural text.   E.7.3      IG1100    Corrected text identifier for payphone                        recognition tone to avoid clash with base                        package.   E.10.5      IGDUB    Provided informative references for tones and                        procedures for continuity check.   E.13       GEN0202   Added note that TDM package could also apply                        to other transports.   E.13.1     IG1100    Changed default for echo cancellation from                        "on" to provisioned.   E.13.1     IG0601    Corrected type for gain property.   Appendix   TTPOST    Included a number of corrections which were      I                 not picked up in H.248.1 Amendment 1 but which                        do appear in H.248.1 v2.Intellectual Property Rights   The ITU draws attention to the possibility that the practice or   implementation of this RFC may involve the use of a claimed   Intellectual Property Right.  The ITU takes no position concerning   the evidence, validity or applicability of claimed Intellectual   Property Rights, whether asserted by ITU members or others outside of   the Recommendation development process.   As of the date of approval of this RFC, the ITU had received notice   of intellectual property, protected by patents, which may be required   to implement this RFC.  However, implementors are cautioned that this   may not represent the latest information and are therefore strongly   urged to consult the TSB patent database.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 210]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   The IETF has also received notice of intellectual property claims   relating to Megaco/H.248.1.  Please consult the IETF IPR   announcements athttp://www.ietf.org/ipr.html.Acknowledgments   Megaco/H.248.1 is the result of hard work by many people in both the   IETF and in ITU-T Study Group 16.  This section records those who   played a prominent role in ITU-T meetings, on the Megaco list, or   both.   Megaco/H.248 owes a large initial debt to the MGCP protocol (RFC2705), and thus to its authors, Mauricio Arango, Andrew Dugan, Ike   Elliott, Christian Huitema, and Scott Pickett.  Flemming Andreasen   does not appear on this list of authors, but was a major contributor   to the development of both MGCP and Megaco/H.248.1.RFC 3435 has an   extensive acknowledgement of many other people who worked on media   gateway control before Megaco got started.   The authors of the first Megaco RFCs (2805, then 3015) were Fernando   Cuervo, Nancy Greene, Abdallah Rayhan, Christian Huitema, Brian   Rosen, and John Segers.  Christian Groves conceived and was editor of   Annex C.  The people most active on the Megaco list in the period   leading up to the completion ofRFC 2885 were Brian Rosen, Tom   Taylor, Nancy Greene, Christian Huitema, Matt Holdrege, Chip Sharp,   John Segers, Michael Thomas, Henry Sinnreich, and Paul Sijben.  The   people who sacrificed sleep and meals to complete the massive amount   of work required in the decisive Study Group 16 meeting of February,   2000, were Michael Brown, Ranga Dendi, Larry Forni, Glen Freundlich,   Christian Groves, Alf Heidemark, Steve Magnell, Selvam Rengasami,   Rich Rubin, Klaus Sambor, John Segers, Chip Sharp, Tom Taylor, and   Stephen Terrill.   The most active people on the Megaco list in the period since the   February 2000 have been Tom Taylor, Brian Rosen, Christian Groves,   Madhu Babu Brahmanapally, Troy Cauble, Terry Anderson, Chuong Nguyen,   and Kevin Boyle, but many other people have been regular   contributors.  Brian Rosen did tremendous service in putting together   the Megaco interoperability tests.  On the Study Group 16 side, the   editorial team for the final revised document in February, 2002   included Christian Groves, Marcello Pantaleo, Terry Anderson, Peter   Leis, Kevin Boyle, and Tom Taylor.   Tom Taylor as Megaco Chair managed the day to day operation of the   Megaco list, with Brian Rosen taking an equal share of the burden for   most of the last three years.  Glen Freundlich as the Study Group 16   Rapporteur ran the ITU-T meetings and ensured that all of the work at   hand was completed.  Without Glen's determination the Megaco/H.248Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 211]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003   standard would have taken at least half a year longer to produce.   Christian Groves filled in ably as Rapporteur when Glen could no   longer take part.Authors' Addresses   Terry L. Anderson   24 Hill St   Bernardsville, NJ 07924   USA   EMail: tlatla@verizon.net   Christian Groves   Ericsson AsiaPacificLab Australia   37/360 Elizabeth St   Melbourne, Victoria 3000   Australia   EMail: Christian.Groves@ericsson.com.au   Marcello Pantaleo   Ericsson Eurolab Deuschland   Ericsson Allee 1   52134 Herzogenrath, Germany   EMail: Marcello.Pantaleo@eed.ericsson.se   Tom Taylor   Nortel Networks   1852 Lorraine Ave,   Ottawa, Ontario   Canada K1H 6Z8   Phone: +1 613 736 0961   EMail: taylor@nortelnetworks.comGroves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 212]

RFC 3525                Gateway Control Protocol               June 2003Full Copyright Statement   Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2003).  All Rights Reserved.   This document and translations of it may be copied and furnished to   others, and derivative works that comment on or otherwise explain it   or assist in its implementation may be prepared, copied, published   and distributed, in whole or in part, without restriction of any   kind, provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are   included on all such copies and derivative works.  However, this   document itself may not be modified in any way, such as by removing   the copyright notice or references to the Internet Society or other   Internet organizations, except as needed for the purpose of   developing Internet standards in which case the procedures for   copyrights defined in the Internet Standards process must be   followed, or as required to translate it into languages other than   English.   The limited permissions granted above are perpetual and will not be   revoked by the Internet Society or its successors or assigns.   This document and the information contained herein is provided on an   "AS IS" basis and THE INTERNET SOCIETY AND THE INTERNET ENGINEERING   TASK FORCE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING   BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTY THAT THE USE OF THE INFORMATION   HEREIN WILL NOT INFRINGE ANY RIGHTS OR ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF   MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.Acknowledgement   Funding for the RFC Editor function is currently provided by the   Internet Society.Groves, et al.              Standards Track                   [Page 213]

[8]ページ先頭

©2009-2025 Movatter.jp